JP5951078B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine that, when a lottery opportunity occurs during a game, displays a symbol in a manner that displays a result of a lottery after a symbol change display.

  Conventionally, as this type of gaming machine, a gaming machine that executes an error determination process for a remaining ball remaining in a variable winning device has been disclosed (for example, Patent Document 1).

  In the gaming machine of Patent Document 1, the remaining ball error determination time is reset every time the winning detection of the gaming ball is detected by the winning detection means in the remaining ball error determination processing. It is not necessary to set the determination time, and the remaining sphere error determination time can be shortened as a whole.

As another prior art, there is known a gaming machine that processes passage to a specific area as a no-count error when the solenoid does not operate due to a failure or the like (for example, Patent Document 2).
According to the gaming machine of Patent Document 2, when the solenoid does not operate due to a failure or the like, a no-count error occurs and the game of the pachinko gaming machine is interrupted by the control device. Can be found.

Furthermore, as another prior art, there is a gaming machine that performs error processing by detecting a residual ball or an outflow region passing through a center accessory equipped with a probability variation region (for example, Patent Document 3).
According to the gaming machine disclosed in Patent Literature 3, when an abnormal state occurs in the second variable winning device that determines whether or not to shift to a probability-variable game, the abnormal state can be notified to the game hall management device. .

Japanese Patent No. 4320007 Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 11-253616 JP 2013-31785 A

In the above Patent Documents 1 and 2, the probability variation region (high probability state transition region) is not considered.
On the other hand, the gaming machine of Patent Document 3 includes an abnormal state determination unit that determines whether or not an abnormal state has occurred in the second variable winning device having the probability variation area.

  Then, this abnormal state determination means, specifically, (A) measures the time from the time of entering the second variable winning device to the time of discharging, and the measured time exceeds a predetermined time When it is determined that an abnormal state has occurred, or (B) it is calculated that there are more game balls discharged from the second variable prize device than the game balls won in the second variable prize device. In addition, it is determined that an abnormal state has occurred.

As described above, the gaming machine disclosed in Patent Document 3 can cope with the error states (A) and (B), but various other error states occur in the gaming machine.
For this reason, it corresponds to an error state other than the above (A) and (B), for example, an error state when the game ball passes through the probability variation area even though the game ball should not pass through the probability variation region. I can't.

  Accordingly, an object of the present invention is to provide a technique that can cope with various error states that occur in gaming machines.

The present invention employs the following means for solving the above problems. In addition, the wording in the following brackets is an illustration to the last, and this invention is not limited to this.
Solution 1: The gaming machine of the present solution has an internal lottery execution means for executing an internal lottery when a lottery trigger occurs during the game, and when the internal lottery is executed, the symbols are variably displayed over a predetermined fluctuation time. And a symbol display means for stopping and displaying the symbols in a manner according to the result of the internal lottery, and a closing that makes it difficult to enter the game ball into the big prize opening if the prescribed condition is not satisfied during the game While maintaining the state, when the prescribed condition is satisfied, the variable winning device that shifts from the closed state to the open state that facilitates the entry of the game ball into the grand prize opening, and the result of the internal lottery Corresponds to winning, and when the symbol is stopped and displayed in a predetermined winning manner by the symbol display means, the variable winning device is shifted from the closed state to the opened state for a predetermined time, or at the predetermined time Special game execution means for executing a special game by performing a unit game for shifting the variable prize-winning device from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined number of times until a predetermined number of game balls have entered therein, Provided inside a variable winning device, when the variable winning device is in the closed state, it is difficult for a game ball to pass through, and the variable winning device is in the open state, and special conditions are satisfied. A high-probability state transition area where a game ball can easily pass and a game ball that is provided inside the variable winning device and does not pass through the high-probability state transition area among the game balls that have entered the variable winning device A discharge area through which the ball passes, a ball entry detecting means for detecting that the game ball has entered the big prize opening of the variable prize winning device, and a detection that the game ball has passed through the high probability state transition area. Probability state transition area passage detection means, discharge area passage detection means for detecting that a game ball has passed through the discharge area, and passage of a game ball by the high probability state transition area passage detection means during execution of the special game When the special game is detected, the high probability state transition means for transitioning to the high probability state in which the winning is obtained with a high probability as compared with the low probability state in which the winning is obtained with a predetermined probability with respect to the internal lottery. And the passage of the game ball is detected by the high probability state transition region passage detection means even though it is difficult for the game ball to pass through the high probability state transition region without satisfying the special condition. If it is, the gaming machine includes a high probability state transition region abnormal passage error state determination unit that determines that the state is a high probability state transition region abnormal passage error state.

In the gaming machine of this solution, for example, the game proceeds in the following flow.
(1) When a lottery opportunity occurs during a game (a game ball enters a start winning opening), an internal lottery (special symbol lottery) is executed.
(2) When the internal lottery of (1) is executed, the symbol (special symbol) is variably displayed over a predetermined fluctuation time, and the symbol is stopped and displayed in a manner corresponding to the result of the internal lottery of (1) above. The It takes a certain amount of time (fluctuation time and stop display time) from the start of the symbol display to the stop display. Once the symbol display is started, the stop display is completed. The next internal lottery will not be held until

(3) It is difficult to enter a game ball into the big prize opening if the prescribed conditions (the condition that the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a big hit or small hit mode and the stop display time has elapsed) are not satisfied during the game. While maintaining the closed state, the variable winning device (upper attacker, sub-attacker, probable change) that transitions from the closed state to an open state that facilitates the entry of game balls into the grand prize opening when the prescribed conditions are satisfied An attacker with a region) is provided. When a game ball enters the big prize opening of the variable prize winning device, a special prize bonus (for example, a bonus due to the ball) is given to the player.

(4) When the result of the internal lottery corresponds to winning and the symbol is stopped and displayed in a predetermined winning manner, the variable winning device of (3) is closed for a predetermined time (for example, 29 seconds or 0.1 second). Or the variable winning device of (3) is closed until a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) of game balls have entered within a predetermined time (for example, 29 seconds or 0.1 seconds). A special game (9 round jackpot game, 16 round jackpot game) is executed by performing a unit game for shifting from the state to the open state for a specified number of times (for example, at least once). The player can obtain a lot of profits (outing) by this special game.

  Here, the special game can be executed by using not only the variable winning device of (3) above but also other variable winning devices (for example, an attacker having no built-in probability changing area). However, the special game is not executed using two variable winning devices at the same time, and one round is executed using any one of the two variable winning devices.

(5) A high-probability state transition region (probability variation region) is provided inside the variable winning device (3). This high-probability state transition area is when the game ball is difficult to pass when the variable winning device is in the closed state, and when the variable winning device is in the open state and the special condition is satisfied (for the probability changing region). When the solenoid is activated and the probability variation area is open, or when the variable winning device is long open), the game ball is easy to pass through.

(6) Of the game balls that have entered the variable winning device of (3) above, the game balls that do not pass through the high probability state transition region of (5) pass through the variable winning device of (3). A discharge area is provided. For example, when 10 game balls enter the variable winning device of (3) and three game balls pass through the high probability state transition area of (5), the remaining 7 game balls are: It passes through this discharge area.

(7) A ball entry detecting means (second count switch) is provided for detecting that a game ball has entered the big prize opening of the variable prize winning device of (3) above.
(8) High probability state transition region passage detection means (probability variation region switch) for detecting that the game ball has passed the high probability state transition region of (5) is provided.
(9) Discharge area passage detecting means (discharge port switch) for detecting that the game ball has passed the discharge area of (6) is provided.

(10) When the passing of the game ball is detected by the above (8) during the execution of the special game by the above (4), the low probability state is changed to the high probability state after the special game by the above (4) is completed. The Here, the “low probability state” is a state in which the winning probability of the internal lottery (special symbol lottery) is set to a predetermined probability (for example, 1/399). On the other hand, the “high probability state” is a state in which the winning probability of the internal lottery is set to a high probability (for example, “1/100”) as compared with the “low probability state”.

(11) The high probability state transition region of (8) above, even though it is difficult for the game ball to pass through the high probability state transition region without satisfying the special condition of (5) above. When the passage of the game ball is detected by the passage detection means, it is determined that the state is a high probability state transition region abnormal passage error state.

  Thus, according to the present solution, when the game ball passes through the high probability state transition region even though it is difficult for the game ball to pass through the high probability state transition region, Probability state transition region abnormal passage error state (probability variation region abnormal passage error state) is determined, so that not only malfunction of variable winning device (eg solenoid malfunction, ball clogging, etc.) but also illegal winning device It is possible to appropriately detect various error states resulting from a winning action (care goto, placeball goto) or the like. Thereby, it is possible to find an error state that does not occur first in the normal game. Therefore, it is possible to deal with various error states in a gaming machine equipped with a high probability state transition area.

  In addition, since this solution can detect an error state peculiar to a gaming machine equipped with a high probability state transition area, it is possible to detect a malfunction of the gaming machine by notifying various errors according to the type of error. In addition to being able to detect the staff in the field as soon as possible, it is possible to prevent illegal acts such as goto.

  Solution 2: The gaming machine of the present solution, in Solution 1, the winning type prescribing means for predefining a plurality of winning types with respect to the winning result obtained by the internal lottery, and the winning result by the internal lottery Is obtained, for each unit game of each of the winning types of the plurality of winning types, winning type determining means for determining which of the plurality of winning types specified by the winning type specifying means, Whether the special condition is satisfied for the variable winning device operation pattern defining means for defining the operation pattern of the variable winning device and the unit game for which the high probability state transition region abnormal passing error state is determined Error determination variable prize-winning device operation pattern defining means for defining whether or not the error is determined, the high probability state transition region abnormal passing error state determination means, With reference to the variable winning devices operation pattern defining means for determining errors is a gaming machine and to execute a determination about the high probability state transition regions abnormal passage error condition.

The following features are added to the gaming machine of this solution.
(1) About the result at the time of winning obtained by internal lottery, a plurality of winning types are defined in advance. For multiple winning types, the winning type that opens the high-probability state transition area for a long time (winning pattern that facilitates the passage of game balls), and the winning type that opens the high-probability state transition area for a short period (the passing of game balls is difficult The winning design) is included.

(2) When a winning result is obtained in the internal lottery, it is determined which of the plurality of winning types defined in (1) above is applicable.

(3) The operation pattern of the variable winning device is defined for each unit game of each of the plurality of winning types in (1) above. For example, a 16-round jackpot will be described as an example. In any round from the 1st round to the 16th round, whether or not to operate the variable winning device equipped with the high probability state transition area, The content of whether to open long or short is defined for each unit game of each winning type.

(4) Whether or not a special condition is satisfied for a unit game (for example, 7 rounds to 9 rounds in the case of 9 round symbol 1 winning) for which a high probability state transition region abnormal passing error state is determined ( There is provided an error determination variable winning device operation pattern defining means (probability variation area passing error target round determination data table 1) that defines whether or not a short is released.

(5) Then, referring to the error determination variable winning device operation pattern defining means in (4) above, the determination regarding the high probability state transition region abnormal passing error state is executed.

  According to the present solution means, the determination regarding the high probability state transition region abnormal passing error state is executed with reference to the error determination variable winning device operation pattern defining means, so the winning type (winning symbol) and the number of rounds to be determined Based on the above, it is possible to easily determine whether or not a specific condition is satisfied.

  In addition, since the present solution means is provided with the variable winning device operation pattern defining means for error determination separately from the variable winning device operation pattern defining means, the variable winning device operation pattern defining means is referred to for all rounds. Compared with the method of determining the error state, the unit games for determining the error state can be narrowed down, and an efficient error determination process can be executed.

  Solution means 3: The gaming machine of this solution means that in the solution means 1 or 2, the high probability state transition region abnormal passing error state determination means is the unit game in which the special condition is satisfied in one special game. When the unit game that does not satisfy the special condition is executed a plurality of times without executing the above, the determination regarding the high probability state transition region abnormal passing error state is executed in all the unit games that do not satisfy the special condition It is a gaming machine characterized by doing.

  According to this solution, there is no unit game (long open round) in which a variable winning device with a high probability state transition area is released long in one special game, and a variable winning device with a high probability state transition region is provided. When there are multiple unit games (short open rounds) that are released short (for example, when 7 rounds, 8 rounds, and 9 rounds are awarded for 9 round symbols 1), all short open rounds will shift to a high probability state. Since the determination regarding the abnormal region passing error state is executed, the accuracy of detecting the error state can be improved as compared with the method of determining the error state only in any one of the short open rounds.

  Solution 4: The gaming machine of the present solution is any one of solutions 1 to 3, wherein the high probability state transition region abnormal passing error state determination means satisfies the special condition in one special game. When executing the unit game and the unit game in which the special condition is not satisfied, the unit game in which the special condition is not satisfied does not execute a determination regarding the high probability state transition region abnormal passing error state. It is a gaming machine to play.

  In this solution, a unit game in which a variable winning device with a high probability state transition area is released long in one special game (long open round), and a unit game in which a variable winning device with a high probability state transition area is short-opened (For example, when a 9-round symbol 2 wins a 7-round win with a long open and a short-open with 8 and 9 rounds), the 8 and 9 short open rounds are high. Do not perform a determination regarding the probability state transition region abnormal passing error state.

  Here, originally, the short opening round is a scene in which a high probability state transition region abnormal passing error state is determined, but when a long opening round is included in one special game, If the game is progressing on the street, the game ball easily passes through the high probability state transition region, so it is almost certain that the game ball will transition to the high probability state. And in such a scene, if a ball launched by a bona fide player accidentally passes a high probability state transition area in a short open round, and it is determined that it is a high probability state transition area abnormal passage error state, May interrupt the continuity of.

  Therefore, in the present solution, when a long open round is included in one special game, the high probability state transition region abnormal passing error state is not determined in the short open round, and the efficient game progress And an efficient error state determination process can both be achieved.

  Solving means 5: The gaming machine of the present solving means in any one of the solving means 1 to 4, wherein the high probability state transition region abnormal passing error state determining means determines that the high-probability state transition area abnormal passing error state determination means The gaming machine is characterized by executing a determination regarding a probability state transition region abnormal passing error state.

  In this solution, the ball sweep time (several seconds after the attacker closes) is used to execute a determination on the high probability state transition region abnormal passing error state after a specified time has passed since the end of the unit game (after about several seconds). It is possible to execute an error state determination process in consideration of a certain amount of time.

In this way, since the present solution can execute the error state determination process in consideration of the ball sweep time, even if it is not in the error state during the ball sweep time, the error state is detected during the ball sweep time. When it becomes, it can determine with an error state.
For this reason, according to the present solution, the accuracy of error state determination is improved because the high probability state transition region abnormal passing error state can be detected for a period of several seconds after the unit game ends. Can be made.

  Solution 6: When the gaming machine of this solution is determined to be in the high probability state transition area abnormal passing error state in any of Solution 1 to 5, an error state is occurring with respect to the external device. A signal indicating that the high probability state transition region abnormal passing error state has occurred from the main control device to the production control device. A game machine comprising a process execution means when a probability state transition region abnormal passage error state occurs.

In this solution, when it is determined that the state is a high probability state transition region abnormal passage error state, the following processing is executed.
(1) A signal indicating that an error state is occurring is transmitted to an external device (external terminal board, hall computer). Thereby, generation | occurrence | production of a high probability state transition area | region abnormal passage error state can be continuously transmitted with respect to an external device.

(2) High probability state transition region abnormal passage error state occurrence information (command) indicating that a high probability state transition region abnormal passage error state has occurred is transmitted from the main control device to the production control device. As a result, not only the main control device but also the effect control device can recognize that the high probability state transition region abnormal passage error state has occurred, and can execute an error effect according to the error state.

  Solution 7: The gaming machine of the present solution solves the problem when the power is turned on again after the power is turned off in the high probability state transition area abnormal passing error state in the solution 6. On the other hand, a gaming machine comprising a high-probability state transition region abnormal passage error state cancellation process execution means for stopping transmission of a signal indicating that an error state is occurring.

  In this solution, when a high-probability state transition region abnormal passage error state occurs, if the power is turned on again after the power is turned off, a signal indicating that an error state is occurring is transmitted to the external device. Therefore, the cancellation of the error state can be transmitted to the external device.

  Solution 8: The gaming machine of the present solution, when the solution 6 or 7 receives the high probability state transition area abnormal passing error state occurrence information, until the power is turned off, the high probability state transition area A high-probability state transition region abnormal passage error state occurrence transmission effect executing means for performing a high-probability state transition region abnormal passage error state occurrence transmission effect executing means for transmitting that an abnormal passage error state has occurred. Machine.

  In this solution, when the high probability state transition region abnormal passage error state occurrence information is received, the high probability state that conveys that a high probability state transition region abnormal passage error state has occurred until the power is turned off. Since the transition region abnormal passage error state occurrence transmission effect is executed, it is possible to easily convey to the player and the staff of the game hall that the high probability state transition region abnormal passage error state has occurred. Here, the power cut-off may be a power cut-off of the main control device or a power cut-off of the effect control device.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to cope with various error states that occur in a gaming machine.

It is a front view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a front view which shows a game board unit independently. It is a front view shown about the various lamps with which the pachinko machine was equipped. It is a front view which expands and shows a part of game board unit. It is a block diagram which shows the various electronic devices with which the pachinko machine was equipped. It is a flowchart (1/2) which shows the example of a procedure of a reset start process. It is a flowchart (2/2) which shows the example of a procedure of a reset start process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a power-off occurrence check process concretely. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of an interruption management process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a switch input event process (1/2). It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a switch input event process (2/2). It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the process at the time of a probability change area | region switch passage. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the probability change area | region passing error object round determination process. It is a figure which shows the example of a program of the probability change area | region passage error object round determination data table. It is a figure which shows the example of a program of the probability variation area | region passing error object round determination data table 1. FIG. It is a figure which shows the example of a program of the probability variation area | region passing error object round determination data table 2. FIG. It is a figure which shows the example of a program of the probability change area | region passing error object round determination data table 3. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a special winning opening abnormal discharge | emission error setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a 1st special symbol memory update process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a 2nd special symbol memory update process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the production | presentation determination process at the time of acquisition. It is a flowchart which shows the structural example of a special symbol game process. It is a figure which shows the open | release operation | movement pattern of a variable winning apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the special symbol change pre-processing. It is a figure which shows an example of the fluctuation pattern selection table at the time of a loss (low probability non-time shortening state). It is a figure which shows an example of the fluctuation pattern selection table at the time of loss (low probability time reduction state). It is a figure which shows an example of the fluctuation pattern selection table at the time of loss (high probability time reduction state). It is a figure which shows the structural example of the stop symbol selection table at the time of the 1st special symbol big hit. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the 2nd special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table. It is a figure which shows an example of the big hit hour fluctuation pattern selection table (low probability non-time shortening state). It is a figure which shows an example of the big hit hour fluctuation pattern selection table (low probability time reduction state). It is a figure which shows an example of the big hit hour fluctuation pattern selection table (high probability time reduction state). It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a special symbol memory | storage area shift process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the special symbol stop display process. It is a flowchart which shows the structural example of a display output management process. It is a flowchart which shows the structural example of a big win time variable winning apparatus management process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a big winning opening big opening opening pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the big winning opening big opening / closing operation | movement process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the big winning prize closing opening process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a next round transfer process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the end process at the time of big hit. It is a flowchart which shows the structural example of the variable winning device management process at the time of a small hit. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the big winning opening opening pattern setting process at the time of a small hit. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the big winning opening opening / closing operation | movement process at the time of a small hit. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the big winning opening closing process at the time of a small hit. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the end process at the time of a small hit. It is a timing chart which shows the time change of the opening pattern of the big prize opening according to winning design, and production contents. It is a figure explaining the detail of the error processing content regarding fraud etc. (1/4). It is a figure explaining the detail of the error processing content regarding fraud etc. (2/4). It is a figure explaining the detail of the error processing content regarding fraud etc. (3/4). It is a figure explaining the detail of the error processing content regarding fraud etc. (4/4). It is a figure explaining the detail of the error processing content regarding payout. It is a figure explaining the game flow developed when it corresponds to "9 round symbol 1" or "9 round symbol 2" in normal mode. It is a figure explaining the game flow developed when it corresponds to "16 round symbols" or "9 round symbols 2" in fireworks rush or coast mode. It is a continuation figure showing an example of a production picture corresponding to change display and stop display of a special symbol. It is a continuous figure which shows the flow of the reach production performed at the time of big hit (winning) in the case of corresponding to "9 round symbols 1" etc. in a non-time shortening state. It is a continuation figure which shows partially the example of the production of the big role production when it corresponds to "9 round symbols 1" etc. in normal mode (1/4). It is a continuation figure which shows partially the example of the production of the big role production when it corresponds to "9 round symbols 1" etc. in normal mode (2/4). It is a continuation figure which shows partially the example of the production effect of the big role when it corresponds to “9 round symbols 1” etc. in normal mode (3/4). It is a continuation figure which shows partially the example of the production effect of a big role when it corresponds to "9 round symbols 1" etc. in normal mode (4/4). It is a continuation figure which shows the example of an effect of fireworks rush. It is a continuation figure which shows the example of the presentation performed at the time of winning in a fireworks rush or the time of a mistake (1/4). It is a continuation figure which shows the example of the presentation performed at the time of winning in a fireworks rush or the time (2/4). It is a continuation figure which shows the example of the presentation performed at the time of winning in a fireworks rush or the time (3/4). It is a continuation figure which shows the example of the presentation performed at the time of winning in the fireworks rush or the time off (4/4). FIG. 10 is a continuous diagram partially showing an example of a big role effect executed during a big hit game when the fireworks rush or coast mode corresponds to “9 round symbol 2”. FIG. 10 is a continuous diagram partially showing an example of a big role effect executed during a big hit game when the fireworks rush or coast mode corresponds to “16 round symbols”. It is a continuation figure which shows the example of a production of coast mode. It is a figure which shows the example of the production | presentation of the error production performed when the big winning a prize entrance / exit ball mismatch error generate | occur | produces. It is a figure which shows the example of the production | presentation of the error production performed when the big prize opening abnormal discharge error generate | occur | produces. It is a figure which shows the example of production | presentation of the error effect performed when the probability variation area | region non-passing error generate | occur | produced. It is a figure which shows the production example of the error production performed when the probability variation area | region abnormal passage error generate | occur | produces. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of effect control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of an error production management process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of an operation | movement memory production | presentation management process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of effect design management processing. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of an effect design change pre-process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a big hit hour variation production pattern selection process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the fluctuation | variation effect pattern selection process at the time of loss. It is a flowchart which shows the structural example of a process at the time of variable winning apparatus operation | movement. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a variable winning apparatus operation | movement pre-processing. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the process during operation | movement of a variable winning apparatus.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter abbreviated as “pachinko machine”) 1. FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 1. The pachinko machine 1 uses a game ball as a game medium, and a player borrows a game ball from a game hall operator to play a game with the pachinko machine 1. In the game of the pachinko machine 1, each game ball is a medium having a game value, and a privilege (profit) that the player enjoys as a result of the game is, for example, a game ball acquired by the player Based on the number of games, it can be converted into a game value. Hereinafter, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 and 2.

〔overall structure〕
The pachinko machine 1 mainly includes an outer frame unit 2, an integrated door unit 4, and an inner frame assembly 7 (a plastic frame, a gaming machine frame) as its main body. The integrated door unit 4 is located on the foremost side when viewed from the front facing the player. An inner frame assembly 7 is located on the back side (back side) of the integrated door unit 4, and the outer frame unit 2 is disposed so as to surround the outer side of the inner frame assembly 7.

  The outer frame unit 2 is a structure in which wood and metal materials are combined in a vertically long rectangular shape. The outer frame unit 2 has a fastener such as a screw attached to an island facility (not shown) in the game hall. It is used and fixed. In the vertically long rectangular outer frame unit 2, wood is used for a portion corresponding to the upper and lower short sides, and a metal material is used for a portion corresponding to the left and right long sides.

  The integrated door unit 4 has a structure in which the tray unit 6 is integrated at a lower position thereof. The integrated door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly 7 are attached to the island facility via the outer frame unit 2, and these operate in an openable manner via a hinge mechanism (not shown). An opening / closing axis of a hinge mechanism (not shown) extends in the vertical direction along the left end as viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 1.

  A unified lock unit 9 is provided on the inner side of the right edge (the left edge in FIG. 2) of the inner frame assembly 7 when viewed from the front in FIG. Correspondingly, a locking tool (not shown) is also provided on the right side edge (back side) of the integrated door unit 4 and the outer frame unit 2. As shown in FIG. 1, in the state where the integrated door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly 7 are closed with respect to the outer frame unit 2, the unified lock unit 9 on the back side of the integrated door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly together with the locking device. 7 cannot be opened.

  Further, a cylinder lock 6 a with a key hole is provided on the right edge of the tray unit 6. For example, when an administrator of the game hall inserts a dedicated key into the keyhole and twists the cylinder lock 6a clockwise, the unified lock unit 9 operates and the integrated door unit 4 can be opened together with the inner frame assembly 7. . If these are opened from the outer frame unit 2 to the front side (moved like a door), the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is exposed on the front side.

  On the other hand, when the cylinder lock 6a is twisted counterclockwise, only the locking of the integrated door unit 4 is released while the inner frame assembly 7 remains locked, and the integrated door unit 4 can be opened. When the integrated door unit 4 is opened to the front side, the game board unit 8 is directly exposed, and in this state, the manager of the game hall can remove obstacles such as ball clogging in the board surface. Further, when the integrated door unit 4 is opened, the tray unit 6 is also opened to the front side together.

  The pachinko machine 1 includes the game board unit 8 described above as a game unit. The game board unit 8 is supported by the inner frame assembly 7 behind (inside) the integrated door unit 4. The game board unit 8 can be attached to and detached from the inner frame assembly 7 with the integrated door unit 4 opened to the front side, for example. The integrated door unit 4 is formed with a vertically oval window 4a at the center thereof, and a glass unit (no reference numeral) is attached in the window 4a. The glass unit is a combination of, for example, two transparent plates (glass plates) cut in accordance with the shape of the window 4a. The glass unit is attached to the back side of the integrated door unit 4 via a fixture (not shown). A game area 8a (board surface, game board) is formed on the front surface of the game board unit 8, and this game area 8a is visible to the player from the front side through the window 4a. When the integrated door unit 4 is closed, a space in which a game ball can flow down is formed between the inner surface of the glass unit and the board surface.

  The saucer unit 6 has a shape projecting from the integrated door unit 4 to the front side as a whole, and an upper plate 6b is formed on the upper surface thereof. The upper plate 6b can store a game ball (rental ball) lent to a player and a game ball (prize ball) acquired by winning a prize. In the tray unit 6, a lower plate 6c is formed at the lower position of the upper plate 6b. The lower tray 6c stores game balls that are further paid out when the upper tray 6b is full. The pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment is a so-called CR machine (model connected to the CR unit), and the game balls borrowed by the player are separated from the payout device unit 172 on the back side separately from the prize balls. It is paid out to the dish 6b or the lower dish 6c).

  A lending operation unit 14 is provided on the upper surface of the tray unit 6, and a ball lending button 10 and a return button 12 are arranged on the lending operation unit 14. When a player operates the ball lending button 10 with a valuable medium (for example, a magnetic recording medium, a storage IC built-in medium, etc.) inserted in a CR unit (not shown), the number corresponding to a predetermined frequency unit (for example, 5 degrees). (For example, 125) game balls are lent out. For this reason, a frequency display unit (not shown) is arranged on the upper surface of the lending operation unit 14, and the remaining frequency of the valuable medium put in the CR unit is displayed on this frequency display unit. The player can receive the return of the valuable medium with the remaining frequency by operating the return button 12. Although the CR machine is taken as an example in the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 may be a cash machine (a model not connected to the CR unit) different from the CR machine.

  Further, on the upper surface of the tray unit 6, an upper dish ball removal button 6d is installed in front of the upper dish 6b in the upper position, and a lower dish ball removal lever 6e is located in the center of the lower dish 6c. Is installed. The player can cause the game balls stored in the upper plate 6b to flow down to the lower plate 6c by, for example, pressing the upper plate ball removing button 6d. Also, the player can drop the game balls stored in the lower plate 6c downward and discharge them by sliding the lower plate ball removal lever 6e to the left, for example. The discharged game ball is received by, for example, a ball receiving box (not shown).

  A handle unit 16 is installed at the lower right of the tray unit 6. The player operates the handle unit 16 to operate the launch control board set 174 and can launch (shoot) a game ball toward the game area 8a (ball launcher). The launched game ball rises from the lower edge portion of the game board unit 8 along the left edge portion, is guided by an outer band (not shown), and is thrown into the game area 8a. A large number of obstacle nails, windmills (without reference numerals in the drawing) and the like are arranged in the game area 8a, and the thrown-in game balls flow down in the game area 8a while being guided and guided by the obstacle nails and the windmill. The configuration of the game area 8a (board surface, game board) will be further described later with reference to another drawing.

[Configuration of the front of the frame]
The integrated door unit 4 is provided with a left top lens unit 47 and an upper right illumination unit 49 as components for production. Among these, the left top lens unit 47 incorporates a glass frame top lamp 46 and a left glass frame decoration lamp 48, and the upper right electrical decoration unit 49 incorporates a right glass frame decoration lamp 50. In addition, left and right glass frame decoration lamps 52 are installed in the integrated door unit 4 so as to be connected to the lower part of the left top lens unit 47 and the upper right illumination unit 49, respectively. It extends from the left and right edges of the integrated door unit 4 to the front surface of the tray unit 6. In the integrated door unit 4, the glass frame top lamp 46 and the left and right glass frame decoration lamps 48, 50, and 52 are arranged so as to surround the glass unit.

  The various lamps 46, 48, 50, and 52 described above perform effects by, for example, the light emission of the built-in LEDs (lighting and blinking, change in luminance gradation, change in color tone, and the like). In addition, on the upper part of the integrated door unit 4, speakers on the glass frame 54 and 55 are incorporated in the left top lens unit 47 and the upper right illumination unit 49, respectively. On the other hand, an outer frame speaker 56 is incorporated in the lower left position of the outer frame unit 2. These speakers 54, 55, and 56 output sound effects, BGM, voice, etc. (sound in general) and execute effects.

  In addition, an effect switching button 45 is installed in the center of the tray unit 6 at a position in front of the upper plate 6b. The player switches the contents of the effect (for example, the background screen displayed on the liquid crystal display 42) by pressing the effect switching button 45, or is changing the symbol, displaying the big hit, or playing the big hit game. It is possible to generate a certain effect (notice effect, probability change promotion effect, promotion effect while playing a big role, etc.).

  Further, a jog dial 45a is installed around the effect switching button 45 so as to surround the effect switching button 45 (operation input receiving means, rotary selector). The player can change the contents of the effect displayed on the liquid crystal display unit 42, for example, by rotating the jog dial 45a.

[Configuration on the back side]
As shown in FIG. 2, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, there are a power supply control unit 162, a main control board unit 170, a dispensing device unit 172, a flow path unit 173, a launch control board set 174, and a dispensing control board unit 176. A back cover unit 178 and the like are installed. In addition, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, various electronic devices (including a control computer not shown) constituting the power supply system and control system of the pachinko machine 1, an external terminal board 160, a power cord (power plug) 164, A ground wire (ground terminal) 166, connection wiring (not shown), and the like are installed.

  The payout device unit 172 includes, for example, a prize ball tank 172a and a prize ball case (no reference symbol), and the prize ball tank 172a is installed on the upper edge (back side) of the inner frame assembly 7. In this state, game balls replenished from a replenishment route (not shown) can be stored. The game balls stored in the prize ball tank 172a are guided to a prize ball case through an upper prize ball basket (not shown). The flow path unit 173 guides the game ball sent out from the payout device unit 172 toward the tray unit 6 on the front side.

  The external terminal board 160 is used for connecting the pachinko machine 1 to an external electronic device (for example, a data display device, a hall computer, etc.). Various external information signals (for example, award ball information, door opening information, symbol determination number information, jackpot information, start opening information, etc.) indicating the progress state and maintenance state are output to an external electronic device. ing.

  The power cord 164 secures a power source (electric power) necessary for the operation of the pachinko machine 1 by being connected to, for example, a power source device (for example, AC 24V) installed in an island facility of a game arcade. In addition, the ground wire 166 is connected to a ground terminal that is also installed in the island facility, thereby securing the ground (ground) of the pachinko machine 1.

  FIG. 3 is a front view showing the game board unit 8 alone. The game board unit 8 includes a game board 8b serving as a base, and a game area 8a is formed on the front side of the game board 8b. The game board 8b is made of, for example, a transparent resin plate. With the game board unit 8 fixed to the inner frame assembly 7, the front surface of the game board 8b is parallel to the glass unit. On the front surface of the game board 8b, the above-described game area 8a is formed inside a launch rail (not indicated by reference numeral) installed in a substantially circular shape.

  In the game area 8a, a relatively large effect unit 40 is arranged at the center position, and the game area 8a is largely divided into a left part, a right part and a lower part with the effect unit 40 as the center. The left part of the game area 8a is a first game area (left-handed area) used in a normal game state (low probability non-time shortened state), and the right part of the game area 8a is an advantageous game state (big hit game state) The second game area (right-handed area, specific area) used in a small hit game state, a low probability time shortened state, a high probability time shortened state, or the like. Further, in the game area 8a, a middle start winning opening 26, a starting gate 20, a normal winning opening 22, 24, a variable starting winning apparatus 28, a first variable winning apparatus 30, and a second variable winning apparatus are provided around the effect unit 40. 31 etc. are distributed and installed.

  Among these, the middle start winning opening 26 is arranged at the center of the lower part of the game area 8a. The start gate 20, the variable start winning device 28, the second variable winning device 31, and the first variable winning device 30 are arranged in this order from the top in the right portion of the game area 8a. Here, the first variable winning device 30 is disposed on the right side of the middle start winning port 26, and the second variable winning device 31 is disposed on the upper right side of the first variable winning device 30. Further, the three left normal winning holes 22 are arranged in the left part of the game area 8a, and the one right normal winning hole 24 (predetermined winning hole) is arranged below the variable start winning device 28. .

Further, four obstacle nails are arranged above the variable start winning device 28, and further, a ball entrance 19a and a discharge port 19b are arranged above the nail. The ball inlet 19a and the outlet 19b are connected by a communication passage on the back side (not shown). The game ball that has entered the entrance 19a is decelerated and rectified through this communication passage, and is released from the exit 19b.
Further, an out port 19c (predetermined entrance) is arranged on the right side of the start gate 20. The game ball released from the discharge port 19b basically falls straight and passes through the start gate 20, but enters the out port 19c when it is flipped to the right by the obstacle nail.

  The game balls thrown into the game area 8a enter the middle start winning opening 26, the normal winning openings 22, 24, pass through the start gate 20, and the variable start winning apparatus at the time of operation. 28, the first variable winning device 30 during the opening operation, and the second variable winning device 31 during the opening operation. Here, there is a possibility that game balls flowing down the left area of the game area 8 a mainly enter the middle start winning opening 26 or enter the normal winning opening 22. On the other hand, the game ball flowing down the right area of the game area 8a enters the entrance 19a and is released from the exit 19b, and mainly passes through the start gate 20 or enters the variable start prize device 28 during operation. There is a possibility of entering a ball, entering a first variable winning device 30 during an opening operation, entering a second variable winning device 31 during an opening operation, or entering a normal winning port 24. The game balls that have passed through the start gate 20 continue to flow down in the game area 8a, but the medium start winning port 26, the normal winning ports 22, 24, the variable start winning device 28, the first variable winning device 30, and the second variable winning device. The game balls that have entered the device 31 and the out port 19c are collected to the back side of the game board unit 8 through through holes formed in the game board (plywood material, transparent board, etc. constituting the game board unit 8).

  Here, in the present embodiment, due to the configuration of the game area 8a (the board surface), when a game ball is to enter the middle start winning opening 26 or the normal winning opening 22, an area on the left side in the game area 8a (left-handed) It is necessary to drive a game ball into the area (so-called “left-handed” is executed).

  On the other hand, when a game ball is to be placed in the variable start winning device 28, the first variable winning device 30, the second variable winning device 31, or the normal winning port 24, the right side region (right-handed region) in the game region 8a. ) To play a game ball (perform so-called “right-handed”).

  In the present embodiment, the variable start winning device 28 operates when a predetermined operating condition is satisfied (when a normal symbol is stopped and displayed for a predetermined stop display time in a winning manner), and accordingly. It is possible to enter the right start winning opening 28a (predetermined entrance) (normal electric accessory). The variable start winning device 28 is provided with a tongue-type opening / closing member 28b. In the state shown in the drawing, the opening / closing member 28b is in a position retracted from the board surface (a retreat position), making it impossible for the game ball to enter the right start winning opening 28a. On the other hand, when the opening / closing member 28b moves to a position (driving position) that protrudes to the front side from the board surface, the opening / closing member 28b receives the game ball flowing down from above and guides the game ball to the right start winning opening 28a. Note that the variable start winning device 28 may be a device that opens the right start winning port by displacing the opening / closing member so as to fall forward with the lower edge portion of the opening / closing member as a hinge.

  The first variable winning device 30 described above is a case where a predetermined condition is satisfied (when a special symbol is stopped and displayed in a mode other than non-winning) and a predetermined first condition (for example, 6 rounds from the first round) Is activated when the first or the 16th to 16th rounds are satisfied (special electric accessory, first special entry) Event generation means).

  The first variable winning device 30 is a device arranged on the right side of the middle start winning opening 26 (so-called lower attacker), and has, for example, one opening / closing member 30a. The first variable winning device 30 is a device of a type in which the opening / closing member 30a slides inside the board surface (sliding type attacker). The opening / closing member 30a reciprocates in the front-rear direction with respect to the board surface by, for example, a link mechanism using a solenoid (not shown). The opening / closing member 30a is in the closed position (closed state) in a state of protruding from the board surface to the player side. At this time, the game ball rolls on the upper surface of the opening / closing member 30a. Is not possible (the first big prize opening 30b is closed). When the first variable winning device 30 is activated, the opening / closing member 30a is drawn into the board surface, and the first big winning opening 30b is opened (open state). During this time, the first variable winning device 30 is in a state where the inflow of the game ball is not impossible, and can generate an event of entering the first big winning opening 30b.

  The second variable winning device 31 is the same as the first variable winning device 30 when a prescribed condition is satisfied (when a special symbol is stopped and displayed in a big win mode), and a predetermined second condition (for example, , The seventh round to the ninth round) are satisfied, and it is possible to enter the second large winning opening 31b (specific winning opening) (special electric accessory, second Special entry event generation means).

  The second variable winning device 31 is a device arranged at the upper right of the first variable winning device 30 (so-called upper attacker), and has, for example, one opening / closing member 31a. The second variable winning device 31 is a device of a type in which the opening / closing member 31a slides inside the board surface (sliding type attacker). The opening / closing member 31a reciprocates in the front-rear direction with respect to the board surface by, for example, a link mechanism using a solenoid (not shown). The opening / closing member 31a is in the closed position (closed state) in a state of protruding from the board surface to the player side. At this time, the game ball rolls on the upper surface of the opening / closing member 31a. Cannot enter the ball (the second large winning opening 31b is closed). Then, when the second variable winning device 31 is activated, the opening / closing member 31a is drawn into the board surface, and the second large winning opening 31b is opened (open state). During this time, the second variable winning device 31 is in a state where the inflow of the game ball is not impossible, and can generate an event of entering the second large winning port 31b.

  In addition, a guide passage 31 c for guiding a game ball that has entered the second variable winning device 31 is disposed inside the second variable winning device 31. The guide passage 31c extends downward from the second major winning opening 31b, turns left from there, extends to the lower left, and then extends downward again.

  A second count switch 85 is disposed upstream of the guide passage 31c, and a probability variation region blade member 31d and a probability variation region hole 31e are disposed in the middle flow of the guide passage 31c. A discharge port 31f is disposed downstream of the air outlet.

  A game ball that has entered the second variable winning device 31 is detected by the second count switch 85 to enter first. Here, when the probability variation region solenoid that operates the probability variation region blade member 31d is ON, the probability variation region blade member 31d rises and guides the game ball to the probability variation region hole 31e. On the other hand, if the probability variation region solenoid that operates the probability variation region blade member 31d is OFF, the probability variation region blade member 31d does not rise, so the game ball passes through the upper portion of the probability variation region blade member 31d, It is guided to the discharge port 31f.

[Probability variation region (high probability state transition region)]
Further, a probability variation region (no reference sign) is provided in the probability variation region hole 31e. The probability variation area is an area in which a game ball cannot pass when the second variable winning device 31 is in a closed state, and the probability varying region blade member 31d is activated when the second variable winning device 31 is in an open state. If it is, it is an area through which game balls can pass.

The probability variation region blade member 31d operates when the second variable prize-winning device 31 is released during the big hit game. The operation pattern of the probability variation region blade member 31d is that the production region is opened for a short period of time (for example, 0.1 seconds) simultaneously with the start of the round, and then closed for a few seconds (about 2 to 3 seconds), and then the probability variation region is extended for a long time. It is a pattern that is opened for a long time (for example, about 20 seconds). It should be noted that, since the game ball does not reach the probability variation region blade member 31d in the short-term release that is executed simultaneously with the start of the round, it is difficult for the game ball to be guided to the probability variation region by this operation.
Further, even if the probability variation area blade member 31d is operated, it is difficult for the game ball to pass through the probability variation area when the second variable winning device 31 is opened in a short circuit.

[Discharge area]
Further, a discharge area (no reference sign) is provided inside the discharge port 31f. The discharge area is an area through which a game ball that does not pass through the probability variation area passes among the game balls that have entered the second variable winning device 31.

  In the game board unit 8, the effect unit 40 is installed from the center position to the right side portion. The effect unit 40 has an upper edge portion 40a that functions as a guide member that changes the flow direction of the game ball, and includes various decorative parts 40b and 40c on the inner side. The decorative parts 40b and 40c can enhance the decorativeness of the game board unit 8 by three-dimensional modeling, and can perform a stunning operation by emitting transmitted light from, for example, a built-in light emitter (LED or the like). . In addition, a liquid crystal display 42 (image display) is installed inside the effect unit 40, and various effect images are displayed on the liquid crystal display 42, including effect symbols corresponding to special symbols. . In this way, the game board unit 8 impresses the player with the characteristics of the pachinko machine 1 based on the configuration of the board surface and the decorativeness of the effect unit 40. Further, when the game board 8b is a transparent resin board (for example, an acrylic board) as in the present embodiment, various decorative bodies (including a movable body and a light emitting body) arranged not only on the front side but also behind the game board 8b. ) Can be added.

  In addition, a drive source (for example, a motor, a solenoid, etc.) is attached to the interior of the effect unit 40 together with a movable body 40f for effect (for example, a decoration of a ship on which three animals are on board). The effect movable body 40f can execute an effect accompanied by an operation of a tangible object in addition to an effect using an image by the liquid crystal display 42 and an effect by a light emitter. Due to the effects using these movable bodies 40f, appealing power different from the effects using two-dimensional images can be exhibited.

  In addition, a ball guide passage 40d is formed at the left edge of the effect unit 40, and a rolling stage 40e is formed at the lower edge thereof. The ball guide passage 40d is opened obliquely upward to the left in the game area 8a. When a game ball flowing down in the game area 8a randomly flows into the ball guide path 40d, it passes through the inside and rolls. Released onto the stage 40e. The upper surface of the rolling stage 40e has a smooth curved surface. Here, the game ball can roll in the left-right direction. The game ball that has rolled on the rolling stage 40e will eventually flow into the lower game area 8a. A ball discharge path 40k is formed at the center position of the rolling stage 40e, and the game ball guided from the rolling stage 40e to the ball discharge path 40k easily flows into the middle start winning opening 26 just below the ball discharge path 40k. .

  In addition, an out port 32 is formed in the game area 8 a, and game balls that have not entered (winned) in various winning ports are finally collected through the out port 32 to the back side of the game board unit 8. In addition, the game area includes game balls that have entered the normal winning ports 22, 24, the middle starting winning port 26, the right starting winning port 28a, the first variable winning device 30, the second variable winning device 31, and the out port 19c. All game balls that have been driven into the 8a are collected to the back side of the game board unit 8. The collected game balls are discharged out of the frame from the back side of the pachinko machine 1 through an out passage assembly (not shown), and further join a supply path of an island facility (not shown).

[Details of various lamps]
FIG. 4 is a front view showing various lamps installed in the pachinko machine.
The pachinko machine includes a glass frame top lamp 46, a left glass frame decoration lamp 48, a right glass frame decoration lamp 50, left and right glass frame decoration lamps 52, a panel lamp 53, and the like. It consists of LED lamp groups.

For example, the glass frame top lamp 46 is configured by a total of eight LED lamp groups including six LED lamps 46a arranged in the lower stage and two LED lamps 46b arranged in the upper stage.
The left glass frame decoration lamp 48 is composed of nine LED lamp groups of LED lamps 48a to 48g arranged in order from the lower stage to the upper stage.
The right glass frame decoration lamp 50 is configured by nine LED lamp groups of LED lamps 50a to 50g arranged in order from the lower stage to the upper stage.

  The left and right glass frame decorative lamps 52 are LED lamps 52a to 52i arranged in order from the lower left side to the upper stage, LED lamps 52j to 52r arranged in order from the lower right side to the upper stage, and an effect switching button. It is composed of 19 LED lamp groups of LED lamps 52 s built in 45.

  The LED lamp groups constituting the glass frame top lamp 46, the left glass frame decoration lamp 48, the right glass frame decoration lamp 50, and the left and right glass frame decoration lamps 52 are each composed of full-color LED lamps. The full-color LED lamp is a lamp in which three basic light emitters corresponding to the three primary colors of light, that is, a red LED lamp, a green LED lamp, and a blue LED lamp are incorporated. The LED lamp group may be a single color LED lamp.

In addition, a number of panel lamps 53 are provided in the production unit and the panel. For example, three LED lamps 53a, 53b, 53c arranged in the horizontal direction are provided inside the movable body for production 40f, and LED lamps 53d, 53e are provided inside the production units 40b, 40c, respectively. Yes.
Further, an LED lamp 53f is provided below the left start winning opening 26. Each of the LED lamps 53a to 53f corresponds to a full color LED lamp. Although not specifically shown, in addition to these lamps, a number of LED lamps are arranged in the effect unit and the game board surface.

  FIG. 5 is an enlarged front view showing a part of the game board unit 8 (lower left position in the window 4a). That is, the game board unit 8 is provided with a normal symbol display device 33 and a normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a at the lower left position in the window 4a, for example, as well as a first special symbol display device 34 and a second special symbol display device 35. And a game state display device 38 is provided. Among these, the normal symbol display device 33, for example, turns on two lamps (LEDs) alternately to display the normal symbols variably, and stops and displays the normal symbols when the lamps are turned on or off. The normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a displays 0 to 4 memory numbers depending on, for example, a combination of turning off, lighting, or blinking of two lamps (LEDs). For example, in a display mode in which both lamps are extinguished, a memory number of 0 is displayed, in a display mode in which one lamp is lit, a memory number of 1 is displayed, and in a display mode in which the same one lamp is blinked. In the display mode in which two stored numbers are displayed, and in addition to blinking one lamp, the other lamp is lit, three stored numbers are displayed, and in the display mode in which the two lamps are flashed together, the stored number is four. For example, the individual is displayed. Here, although two lamps (LEDs) are used here, the normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a may be configured using four lamps (LEDs). In this case, the number of working memories can be displayed by the number of lamps to be lit.

  The normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a changes to the display mode after being incremented one by one in the sense of memorizing the occurrence of an operation lottery trigger each time a game ball passes through the start gate 20. Then, every time a change of the normal symbol is started with the passage (up to 4) as a trigger, the display mode is changed by one by one. In this embodiment, when the normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a is not lit (the number of memories is 0), the game ball passes through the start gate 20 in a state in which the normal symbol can already start to change (during stop display). However, the display mode does not change. That is, the memorized number (maximum 4) represented by the display mode of the normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a represents the number of passages at which the variation of the normal symbol has not started yet.

  In addition, the first special symbol display device 34 and the second special symbol display device 35 display, for example, a change state and a stopped state of the corresponding first special symbol or second special symbol by 7 segment LED (with dots), respectively. (Symbol display means). The first special symbol display device 34 and the second special symbol display device 35 may have a form in which a plurality of dot LEDs are arranged geometrically (for example, in a circular shape).

  Further, the first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a and the second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a have 0 to 4 each, for example, depending on a display mode constituted by a combination of extinction or lighting and blinking of two lamps (LED). Is stored (memory number display means). For example, in a display mode in which both lamps are extinguished, a memory number of 0 is displayed, in a display mode in which one lamp is lit, a memory number of 1 is displayed, and in a display mode in which the same one lamp is blinked. In the display mode in which two stored numbers are displayed, and in addition to blinking one lamp, the other lamp is lit, three stored numbers are displayed, and in the display mode in which the two lamps are flashed together, the stored number is four. For example, the individual is displayed.

  The first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a is displayed after being incremented by one in the sense of memorizing that a game ball has entered the middle start winning opening 26 every time a game ball enters the middle start winning opening 26. It changes to a mode (up to a maximum of 4), and changes to the display mode after being reduced one by one each time the change of the special symbol is triggered by the entry. Further, the second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a is incremented by one in the sense that each time a game ball enters the variable start winning device 28, it stores that the game ball has entered the right start winning port 28a. Change to the display mode (up to 4), and each time the change of the special symbol is started with the entry, the display mode is changed by 1 each. In the present embodiment, when the first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a is not lit (the number of memories is 0), the middle start winning opening 26 is in a state where the first special symbol can already start to change (when stopped). Even if a game ball enters, the display mode does not change. In addition, when the second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a is not lit (the number of memories is 0), a game ball enters the variable start winning device 28 in a state where the second special symbol can already start to change (when stopped). Even if it is a sphere, the display mode does not change. That is, the number of memories (maximum of 4) represented by the display mode of each special symbol operation memory lamp 34a, 35a is the number of incoming balls for which the variation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol has not yet started. It represents the number of times.

  The game state display device 38 includes LEDs corresponding to, for example, jackpot type display lamps 38a and 38b, a probability variation state display lamp 38d, a short time state display lamp 38e, and a launch position designation lamp 38f. In the present embodiment, the normal symbol display device 33, the normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a, the first special symbol display device 34, the second special symbol display device 35, the first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a, and the second special symbol are described. The symbol operation memory lamp 35a and the game state display device 38 are attached to the game board unit 8 in a state of being mounted on one integrated display board 89.

[Control configuration]
Next, a configuration related to control of the pachinko machine 1 will be described. FIG. 6 is a block diagram showing various electronic devices equipped in the pachinko machine 1. The pachinko machine 1 includes a main control device 70 (main control computer) that serves as the center of the control operation. The main control device 70 mainly has a function of controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko machine 1. Yes. The main controller 70 is built in the main control board unit 170 described above.

  The main controller 70 is equipped with a circuit board (main control board) on which a main control CPU 72 as a central processing unit is mounted. The main control CPU 72 includes a ROM 74, a RAM ( RWM) 76 and other semiconductor memories are integrated as an LSI. The main controller 70 is equipped with a random number generator 75 and a sampling circuit 77. Among these, the random number generator 75 generates a hardware random number (for example, 0 to 65535 in decimal notation) for the big symbol determination of the special symbol lottery or the normal symbol lottery, and the random number generated here is generated. Is input to the main control CPU 72 through the sampling circuit 77. In addition, the main controller 70 is equipped with peripheral ICs such as an input / output (I / O) port 79, a clock generation circuit (not shown), a counter / timer circuit (CTC), etc., and these are circuited together with the main control CPU 72. It is mounted on the board. A signal transmission path, a power supply path, a control bus, and the like are formed as wiring patterns on the circuit board (or the inner layer portion).

  The start gate 20 described above is integrally provided with a gate switch 78 for detecting the passage of a game ball. In addition, the game board unit 8 includes a medium start winning port 26, a variable start winning device 28, a first variable winning device 30, and a second variable winning device 31 corresponding to the middle start winning port switch 80 and the right start winning port, respectively. A switch 82, a first count switch 84, and a second count switch 85 are provided. Each start winning port switch 80, 82 is for detecting the entrance of a game ball into the middle start winning port 26 and the variable start winning device 28 (right start winning port 28a). The first count switch 84 is for detecting the number of game balls that have entered the first variable prize-winning device 30 (first big prize opening) and counting the number thereof. Further, the second count switch 85 is for detecting the number of game balls that have entered the second variable winning device 31 (second big prize opening 31b) and counting the number thereof (entrance detection means). . Further, the probability variation area switch 95a is a switch for detecting that the game ball has passed through the probability variation area disposed inside the second variable winning device 31 (high probability state transition area passage detection means). Furthermore, the discharge port switch 95b is a switch for detecting that the game ball has passed through the discharge area disposed inside the second variable prize-winning device 31 (discharge area passage detection means).

  Similarly, the game board unit 8 includes a first winning port switch 86 for detecting a game ball entering the normal winning port 22 and a second winning port switch for detecting a game ball entering the normal winning port 24. 81 is equipped. In addition, although the configuration using the common winning opening switch 86 is given as an example for the three normal winning openings 22 on the left side, for example, three winning opening switches are installed, and the game balls for the respective normal winning openings 22 are arranged. Incoming balls may be detected individually.

  In any case, winning detection signals of these switches are input to the main control CPU 72 via an input / output driver (not shown). In the configuration of the game board unit 8, in this embodiment, the gate switch 78, the first count switch 84, the second count switch 85, the first winning port switch 86, the second winning port switch 81, the probability changing area switch 95a, The winning detection signal from the exit switch 95b is transmitted via the panel relay terminal board 87, and the panel relay terminal board 87 is provided with a wiring pattern, a connection terminal, etc. for relaying each winning detection signal. Yes.

  The above-mentioned normal symbol display device 33, normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a, first special symbol display device 34, second special symbol display device 35, first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a, second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a and game The state display device 38 is controlled in display operation based on a control signal from the main control CPU 72. The main control CPU 72 outputs control signals for the display devices 33, 34, 35, 38 and the lamps 33a, 34a, 35a according to the progress of the game, and controls the lighting state of each LED. The display devices 33, 34, 35, and 38 and the lamps 33a, 34a, and 35a are installed in the game board unit 8 in a state of being mounted on one integrated display board 89 as described above. A control signal is transmitted from the main control CPU 72 to the display substrate 89 through the panel relay terminal board 87.

  In addition, the game board unit 8 includes a variable start winning device 28, a first variable winning device 30, a second variable winning device 31, and a normal electric accessory solenoid 88 and a first large winning opening corresponding to the upstream of the probability changing region, respectively. A solenoid 90, a second big prize opening solenoid 97, and a probability changing area solenoid 99 are provided. These solenoids 88, 90, 97, 99 are operated (excited) based on a control signal from the main control CPU 72, and open / close operations of the variable start winning device 28, the first variable winning device 30, and the second variable winning device 31, respectively ( Actuating) or moving the probability variation region blade member 31d. The solenoids 88, 90, 97, and 99 also transmit control signals from the main control CPU 72 through the panel relay terminal plate 87.

Further, the game board unit 8 is provided with a magnetic detection sensor 202 (magnetic detection means), a vibration detection sensor 204 (vibration detection means), and a radio wave detection sensor 206 (radio wave detection means).
The magnetic sensor 204 detects the magnetic flux flying to the game board unit 8 at the installation position, and outputs a detection signal corresponding to the density (magnetic strength). Further, the vibration sensor 206 detects acceleration (vibration) applied to the game board unit 8 at the installation position, and outputs a detection signal corresponding to the magnitude. Further, the radio wave detection sensor 206 detects a radio wave that reaches the game board unit 8 at the installation position, and outputs a detection signal corresponding to the reception intensity of the radio wave. The detection signals of the magnetic detection sensor 202, the vibration detection sensor 204, and the radio wave detection sensor 206 are input to the main controller 70 (main control CPU 72) through the panel relay terminal board 87, respectively. Note that a plurality of magnetic detection sensors 202, vibration detection sensors 204, and radio wave detection sensors 206 can be arranged at locations that require detection.

  In addition, a glass frame opening switch 91 is installed in the integrated door unit 4, and a plastic frame opening switch 93 is installed in the inner frame assembly 7. When the integrated door unit 4 is opened alone, a contact signal from the glass frame opening switch 91 is input to the main controller 70 (main control CPU 72), and the inner frame assembly 7 is opened from the outer frame unit 2. Then, a contact signal from the plastic frame opening switch 93 is input to the main controller 70 (main control CPU 72). The main control CPU 72 can detect the open state of the integrated door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly 7 from these contact signals. When the main control CPU 72 detects the open state of the integrated door unit 4 or the inner frame assembly 7, the main control CPU 72 generates a door open information signal as the external information signal.

  On the back side of the pachinko machine 1, a payout control device 92 is provided. The payout control device 92 (payout control computer) controls the operation of the payout device unit 172 described above. The payout control device 92 is equipped with a circuit board (payout control board) on which a payout control CPU 94 is mounted. The payout control CPU 94 is also an LSI in which a semiconductor memory such as a ROM 96 and a RAM 98 is integrated together with a CPU core not shown. It is configured. The payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94) controls the operation of the payout device unit 172 based on the prize ball instruction command from the main control CPU 72, and executes the payout operation of the requested number of game balls. The main control CPU 72 generates a prize ball information signal as the above external information signal together with the prize ball instruction command.

  In a prize ball case (not shown) of the payout device unit 172, a payout device substrate 100 is installed together with a payout motor 102 (for example, a stepping motor). The payout device substrate 100 is provided with a drive circuit for the payout motor 102. Yes. The payout device substrate 100 specifically controls the rotation angle of the payout motor 102 based on the payout number instruction signal from the payout control device 92 (the payout control CPU 94), and pays out the designated number of game balls from the prize ball case. Let it come out. The paid-out game ball is sent to the tray unit 6 through the payout flow path in the flow path unit 173.

  Further, for example, a payout path ball cut switch 104 is installed at an upstream position of the prize ball case, and a payout counting switch 106 and a payout detection switch 107 are installed at a downstream position of the payout motor 102. When a prize ball is actually paid out by driving the payout motor 102, a count signal from the payout count switch 106 is input to the payout device board 100 each time, and a detection signal from the payout detection switch 107 is sent to the payout device board 100. Is input. Further, when a ball break occurs at an upstream position of the prize ball case, a contact signal from the payout path ball break switch 104 is input to the payout device substrate 100. The dispensing device substrate 100 transmits the input count signal, contact signal, and detection signal to the dispensing control device 92 (dispensing control CPU 94). The payout control CPU 94 can detect the actual payout number, the ball-out state, and the presence / absence of payout based on the signal received from the payout device substrate 100.

  Further, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with a full tank switch 161, for example, inside the lower plate 6c (the position of the bowl as viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 1). The prize balls (game balls) that are actually paid out are discharged to the upper plate 6b through the flow path unit 173. When the upper plate 6b is full of game balls, As described above, it flows into the lower plate 6c. Further, when the lower plate 6c is filled with game balls, the full tank switch 161 is turned ON, and a full tank detection signal is input to the payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94). In response to this, even if the payout control CPU 94 receives a prize ball instruction command from the main control CPU 72, it temporarily suspends further prize ball operations, and stores the unpaid prize ball remaining number in the RAM 98. Note that the RAM 98 can be backed up even when the power is cut off, so that even if a power failure (including momentary power failure) occurs during the game, the information on the number of remaining unsold prize balls will not be lost. .

  Further, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, a firing solenoid 110 is installed together with the launch control board 108. A ball feed solenoid 111 is provided in the tray unit 6. The launch control board 108, the launch solenoid 110, and the ball feed solenoid 111 constitute the launch control board set 174 described above, and the launch control board 108 is provided with drive circuits for the launch solenoid 110 and the ball feed solenoid 111. ing. Among these, the ball feed solenoid 111 performs an operation of sending out the game balls stored in the tray unit 6 one by one to a predetermined launch position in the launcher case. In addition, the launch solenoid 110 hits the game ball sent to the launch position, and performs the operation of firing game balls one by one continuously (intermittently) toward the game area 8a as described above. Note that the game ball is fired at intervals of, for example, about 0.6 seconds (within 100 per minute).

  On the other hand, the handle unit 16 located on the front side of the pachinko machine 1 is provided with a firing lever volume 112, a touch sensor 114, and a firing stop switch 116. Among these, the firing lever volume 112 generates an analog signal proportional to the operation amount (so-called stroke) of the firing handle by the player. Further, the touch sensor 114 detects that the player's body is touching the handle unit 16 (launching handle) from the change in capacitance, and outputs a detection signal thereof. The firing stop switch 116 generates a firing stop signal (contact signal) in accordance with the player's operation.

  The above receiving tray unit 6 is provided with a launch relay terminal plate 118, and each signal from the launch lever volume 112, the touch sensor 114, and the launch stop switch 116 is sent via the launch relay terminal plate 118. Sent to. The drive signal from the launch control board 108 is applied to the ball feed solenoid 111 via the launch relay terminal board 118. When the player operates the firing handle, an analog signal (which may be an encoded digital signal) is generated by the firing lever volume 112 according to the operation amount, and the firing solenoid 110 is driven based on the signal at this time. Thereby, the strength of launching a game ball is adjusted according to the operation amount of the player. The drive circuit of the firing control board 108 stops driving the firing solenoid 110 when the detection signal from the touch sensor 114 is off (low level) or when the firing stop signal is input from the firing stop switch 116. To do. In addition to this, the launch relay terminal plate 118 is connected with a lending device connection terminal plate 120 such as a game ball, and when the above-mentioned CR unit is not connected to this lending device connection terminal plate 120 such as a game ball, the launch is similarly performed. The drive circuit of the control board 108 stops driving the firing solenoid 110.

  The tray unit 6 includes a frequency display board 122 and a lending / return switch board 123. Of these, the frequency display board 122 is provided with the display of the frequency display unit (7-segment LED for 3 digits). In addition, switch modules connected to the ball lending button 10 and the return button 12 are mounted on the lending / return switch board 123, and when the ball lending button 10 or the return button 12 is operated, the operation signal is lended. And the return switch board 123 via the game ball lending device connection terminal board 120 to the CR unit. Further, a frequency signal indicating the remaining frequency of the valuable medium is transmitted from the CR unit to the frequency display board 122 via the gaming ball lending device connection terminal board 120. A display circuit (not shown) on the frequency display board 122 drives the display unit based on the frequency signal, and displays the remaining frequency of the valuable medium as a numerical value. In addition, when no valuable medium is inserted into the CR unit, or when the remaining frequency of the inserted valuable medium becomes zero, the display circuit of the frequency display board 122 drives the display to display a demonstration (value medium). Display for urging the user to input.

  Further, the pachinko machine 1 includes an effect control device 124 (effect control computer) as a control configuration. The effect control device 124 controls the effect accompanying the progress of the game in the pachinko machine 1. The effect control device 124 is also equipped with a circuit board (composite sub-control board) on which an effect control CPU 126 that is a central processing unit is mounted. The effect control CPU 126 includes a CPU core (not shown) and a semiconductor memory such as a ROM 128 and a RAM 130 as a main memory. The production control device 124 is provided at a position covered with the back cover unit 178 on the back side of the pachinko machine 1.

  The effect control device 124 is equipped with an input / output driver (not shown) and various peripheral ICs, as well as a lamp drive circuit 132 and an acoustic drive circuit 134. The production control CPU 126 performs production control based on the production command transmitted from the main control CPU 72, and gives commands to the lamp driving circuit 132 and the acoustic driving circuit 134 to emit various lamps 46 to 52 and the panel lamp 53. Or a process of actually outputting sound effects, voices, and the like from the speakers 54, 55, and 56.

  The effect control device 124 and the main control device 70 are connected to each other via, for example, a communication harness (not shown). However, the communication between these is performed only in one direction from the main control device 70 to the effect control device 124, and communication in the reverse direction is not performed. The communication harness may adopt a parallel format according to the bus widths of various commands transmitted from the main control device 70 to the effect control device 124, and each driver IC (I / O). A serial format may be adopted according to the hardware configuration.

  The lamp driving circuit 132 includes a switching element such as a PWM (pulse width modulation) IC or a MOSFET (not shown). The lamp driving circuit 132 switches driving voltages (or duty switching) applied to various lamps including LEDs. ) And manage the operation such as light emission and flashing. The various lamps include the glass frame top lamp 46, the left glass frame decoration lamp 48, the right glass frame decoration lamp 50, and the left and right glass frame decoration lamps 52. The game board unit 8 is provided with a board lamp 53 for decoration and production. The panel lamp 53 corresponds to an LED incorporated in the above-described effect unit, or an LED incorporated in the variable start winning device 28, the first variable winning device 30, the second variable winning device 31, and the like. Here, an example is shown in which the left and right glass frame decoration lamps 52 are connected to the glass frame decoration board 136. May be configured to be connected to the lamp driving circuit 132 through a tray electric decoration board.

  The acoustic drive circuit 134 is a sound generator incorporating a sound ROM, an acoustic control IC, an amplifier, etc. (not shown), for example, and this acoustic drive circuit 134 drives the glass frame speakers 54 and 55 and the outer frame speaker 56. Sound output.

  In the present embodiment, a glass frame lighting board 136 is installed on the inner surface of the integrated door unit 4, and drive signals from the lamp driving circuit 132 and the acoustic driving circuit 134 pass through the glass frame lighting board 136 and various lamps 46. To 52 and speakers 54, 55, and 56. Also, the effect switching button 45 is connected to the glass frame decorating board 136, and when the player operates the effect switching button 45, the contact signal is sent to the effect control device 124 through the glass frame decorating board 136. Entered. Furthermore, the jog dial 45a is connected to the glass frame decorating board 136, and when the player rotates the jog dial 45a, the rotation signal is input to the effect control device 124 through the glass frame decorating board 136. . In addition, although the example which connected the effect switch button 45 and the jog dial 45a to the glass frame decor substrate 136 is given here, when the above-described saucer decor board is installed, the effect switch button 45 and the jog dial 45a are the saucer decor. It may be connected to the substrate.

  In addition, a panel board 138 is installed in the game board unit 8, and a movable body motor 57 is connected to the panel board 138 in addition to the panel lamp 53. The movable body motor 57 drives the movable body 40f via a link mechanism (not shown), for example. A drive signal from the lamp drive circuit 132 is applied to the panel lamp 53 and the movable body motor 57 via the panel illumination board 138, respectively.

  The liquid crystal display 42 is installed on the back side of the game board unit 8, and the display screen is visible through a substantially rectangular opening formed in the game board unit 8. Further, an inverter board 158 is installed on the back side of the game board unit 8, and the inverter board 158 generates an AC power source that is applied to a backlight (for example, a cold cathode tube) of the liquid crystal display 42. Further, an effect display control device 144 is installed on the back side of the game board unit 8, and the display operation by the liquid crystal display 42 is controlled by the effect display control device 144. The effect display control device 144 is equipped with a display control CPU 146 that is a general-purpose central processing unit and a circuit board (effect display control board) on which a VDP 152 that is a display processor is mounted. Among these, the display control CPU 146 is configured as an LSI in which semiconductor memories such as a ROM 148 and a RAM 150 are integrated together with a CPU core (not shown). The VDP 152 is configured as an LSI in which a semiconductor core such as an image ROM 154 and a VRAM 156 is integrated with a processor core (not shown). The VRAM 156 can use a part of the storage area as a frame buffer.

  The ROM 128 of the effect control CPU 126 stores a basic program related to effect control, and the effect control CPU 126 executes effect control according to this program. The production control includes production control using various lamps 46 to 53 and speakers 54, 55, and 56 as described above, and production control by image display using the liquid crystal display 42. . The effect control CPU 126 transmits basic information (for example, effect number) related to the effect to the display control CPU 146, and the display control CPU 146 that receives the information transmits a specific effect image based on the basic information. Control the display.

  The display control CPU 146 outputs a more detailed control signal to the VDP 152. Receiving this, the VDP 152 accesses the image ROM 154 based on the control signal, reads necessary image data therefrom, and transfers it to the VRAM 156. Further, the VDP 152 expands the image data on the VRAM 156 for each frame (still image per unit time) in a frame buffer, and each pixel (full color pixel) of the liquid crystal display 42 is expanded based on the buffered image data. Drive individually.

  In addition, a power control unit 162 (power control means) is provided on the back side of the inner frame assembly 7. The power supply control unit 162 has a built-in switching power supply circuit. When external power (for example, AC 24V) is taken from the island facility through the power cord 164, necessary power (for example, DC + 34V, + 12V) can be generated therefrom. The electric power generated by the power supply control unit 162 is distributed to the main control device 70, the payout control device 92, the effect control device 124, and the inverter board 158. Furthermore, power is supplied to the launch control board 108 via the payout control device 92, and power is supplied to the CR unit via the game ball rental device connection terminal board 120. The low voltage power for logic (for example, DC + 5V) is generated by a power supply IC (3-terminal regulator or the like) built in each device. Further, as described above, the power supply control unit 164 is grounded (grounded) to the island facility through the ground wire 166.

  The external terminal plate 160 is connected to the payout control device 92, and various external information signals generated by the main control device 70 (main control CPU 72) pass through the payout control device 92 to the external terminal plate 160. Is output to the outside. The main control device 70 (main control CPU 72) and the payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94) can output an external information signal to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 through the external terminal board 160. The signals output from the external terminal board 160 are collected by, for example, a hall computer (not shown) in a game hall. Here, the configuration via the payout control device 92 is taken as an example, but a configuration in which an external information signal is directly output from the main control device 70 to the external terminal board 160 may be used.

  The above is a configuration example relating to the control of the pachinko machine 1. Next, control processing executed by the main control CPU 72 of the main control device 70 will be described.

[Reset start (main) processing]
When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the main control CPU 72 starts a reset start process. The reset start process restores the gaming state based on the backup information saved at the previous power shutdown (so-called power recovery) or conversely clears the backup information, thereby adjusting the initial state of the pachinko machine 1 Process. The reset start process is positioned as a main process (main control program) for guaranteeing a stable gaming operation of the pachinko machine 1 after adjusting the initial state.

  7 and 8 are flowcharts showing a procedure example of the reset start process. Hereinafter, the process performed by the main control CPU 72 will be described step by step.

  Step S101: First, the main control CPU 72 sets the top address of the stack area in the stack pointer.

  Step S102: Subsequently, the main control CPU 72 sets the vector-type interrupt mode (mode 2) and corrects the default RST-type interrupt mode (mode 0). Thus, thereafter, the main control CPU 72 can refer to an arbitrary address (however, the least significant bit is 0) as an interrupt vector and execute a designated interrupt handler.

  Step S103: The main control CPU 72 executes a standby process at reset. This process is for securing a certain standby time (for example, about several thousand ms) at the time of reset start (for example, power-on) and checking the main power-off detection signal during that time. Specifically, when the main control CPU 72 sets the loop counter for the waiting time, the main control CPU 72 bit-checks the input port of the main power-off detection signal while decrementing the value of the loop counter. The main power-off detection signal is input from, for example, a power monitoring IC that is a peripheral device. If the input of the main power-off detection signal is confirmed before the loop counter reaches 0, the main control CPU 72 restarts the process from the beginning. As a result, for example, the system can be protected when a main power switch (not shown) is turned on and off repeatedly within a short time (about 1 to 2 seconds).

  Step S104: Next, the main control CPU 72 permits access to the work area of the RAM 76. Specifically, the RAM protect setting value in the work area is reset (00H). As a result, thereafter, access to the work area of the RAM 76 is permitted.

  Step S105: Also, the main control CPU 72 performs initial setting of a mask register in order to set an interrupt mask. Specifically, a value for enabling the CTC interrupt is stored in the mask register.

  Step S106: The main control CPU 72 refers to the input signal from the previously cleared RAM clear switch and confirms whether or not the RAM clear switch has been operated (switch ON). If the RAM clear switch is not operated (No), step S107 is executed next.

  Step S107: Next, the main control CPU 72 checks whether or not backup information is stored in the RAM 76, that is, whether or not a backup validity determination flag is set. If the backup is normally completed in the previous power-off process and the backup validity determination flag (for example, “A55AH”) is set (Yes), then the main control CPU 72 executes step S108.

  Step S108: The main control CPU 72 executes a sum check on the backup information in the RAM 76. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sum-checks all areas of the work area of the RAM 76 (a user work area including a use-prohibited area and a stack area) except the backup validity determination flag and the sum check buffer. If the result of the sum check is normal (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S109.

Step S109: The main control CPU 72 resets the backup validity determination flag (for example, “0000H”).
Step S110: Also, the main control CPU 72 clears the command waiting for transmission immediately before the previous power-off occurrence.

  Step S111: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes an effect control return process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 instructs the effect control device 124 to return a command (for example, a model designation command, a special symbol probability state designation command, a special figure destination determination effect command, an effect command when the working memory number is increased, and the action memory number. (Decrease effect command, count counter remaining command, special game state designation command, etc.). In response to this, the effect control device 124 performs the effect state (for example, the internal probability state, the effect symbol display mode, the operation memory count effect display mode, the sound output content, and the various lamps being executed at the time of the previous power shutdown. Light emission state, etc.) can be restored.

  Step S112: The main control CPU 72 executes state return processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets various values in the work area of the RAM 76 based on the backup information, and the gaming state (for example, the display state of special symbols, the internal probability state, The operation memory contents, various flag states, random number update states, etc.) are restored. Further, the main control CPU 72 restores the backed up PC register value.

  Step S112a: If there are various errors that have occurred, the main control CPU 72 executes processing for canceling the various errors that have occurred. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 executes a process of canceling the magnetic error, the probability variation region abnormal passing error, the big winning opening entrance / exit ball mismatch error, and the effect movable body motor error.

  The main control CPU 72 sets the large winning opening entrance / exit ball mismatch error flag to OFF (forced zero clear process) when the large winning opening entrance / exit ball mismatch error flag is ON. When the probability variation region abnormal passage error flag is ON, the main control CPU 72 sets the probability variation region abnormal passage error flag to OFF (forced zero clear processing). Further, the main control CPU 72 executes a process of generating a special winning entry entrance / exit ball mismatch error cancel designation command when the special winning entry entrance / exit ball mismatch error flag is set from ON to OFF. The command generated here is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process (step S212 in FIG. 10). Note that a release command may also be transmitted for other errors.

  On the other hand, when the RAM clear switch is operated at power-on (step S106: Yes), when the backup validity determination flag is not set (step S107: No), or when the backup information is not normal. (Step S108: No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to Step S113.

Step S113: The main control CPU 72 clears the stored contents other than the use prohibited area of the RAM 76. As a result, the work area and stack area of the RAM 76 are all initialized, and even if valid backup information is stored, the contents are erased.
Step S114: Also, the main control CPU 72 performs initial setting of the RAM 76.

  Step S115: The main control CPU 72 executes an effect control output process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 outputs a command (command necessary for effect control) to be transmitted to the effect control device 124 after the initial setting.

  Step S116: The main control CPU 72 executes a payout control output process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 outputs an instruction command for starting the payout of prize balls to the payout control device 92.

  Step S117: The main control CPU 72 executes CTC initial setting processing, and performs initial setting of a CTC (counter / timer circuit) that is a peripheral device. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets an interrupt vector register and sets an interrupt count value (for example, 4 ms) in the CTC. As a result, when a CTC interrupt occurs next time, the main control CPU 72 can continue the processing from the program address of the PC register that has been backed up.

  When the above procedure is executed in the reset start process, the main control CPU 72 shifts to the main loop shown in FIG. 8 (connection symbol A → A).

  Step S118, Step S119: The main control CPU 72 executes the power interruption occurrence check process after prohibiting interruption. In this process, the main control CPU 72 performs bit check on the input port of the main power-off detection signal and monitors the occurrence of power-off (decrease in drive voltage). When the power cut-off occurs, the main control CPU 72 clears the output port buffer corresponding to the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 88, the first big prize opening solenoid 90, the second big prize opening solenoid 97, the probability changing area solenoid 99, etc. The entire contents of the work area excluding the backup validity determination flag and the sum check buffer are backed up, and the sum result value is stored in the sum check buffer. Then, the main control CPU 72 stores the above effective value (for example, “A55AH”) in the backup validity determination flag area, prohibits access to the RAM 76, and stops (NOP) the process. On the other hand, if the power shutoff does not occur, the main control CPU 72 next executes step S120. There is also a known programming example in which the CPU executes the process at the time of the occurrence of power interruption as a non-maskable interrupt (NMI) process.

  Step S120: The main control CPU 72 executes an initial value update random number update process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 increments random numbers for updating (changing) initial values of various software random numbers. In this embodiment, jackpot determined random numbers (hardware random numbers) and various random numbers excluding hit determined random numbers (hardware random numbers) corresponding to ordinary symbols (for example, jackpot symbol random numbers, reach determination random numbers, variation pattern determination random numbers, etc.) Is generated in the program. These software random numbers are updated by a loop counter within a predetermined range in another interrupt process (step S201 in FIG. 10). In this process, the initial value of the loop counter (all The random number of may not be the target). The initial value updating random number is used to randomly change the initial value, and in step S120, the initial value updating random number is updated. Note that the reason why step S120 is executed after the interruption is prohibited in step S118 is that the same process is executed in another interrupt management process (step S202 in FIG. 10). ) To prevent the above). As described above, in the present embodiment, the big hit determined random number and the hit determined random number are hardware random numbers generated by the random number generator 75, and the update cycle is faster than the timer interrupt cycle (for example, several ms). Since it is (for example, several μs), it is not necessary to update the big hit determined random number and the initial value of the hit determined random number.

  Step S121, Step S122: The main control CPU 72 permits the interrupt and executes other random number update processing. The random numbers updated by this processing are random numbers (reach determination random numbers, variation pattern determination random numbers, etc.) that are not related to the determination of the winning type (winning type) among software random numbers. This process is performed in the remaining time when a timer interrupt occurs during execution of the main loop and the main control CPU 72 executes another interrupt management process (FIG. 10). The contents of the interrupt management process will be described later.

[Power failure check processing]
FIG. 9 is a flowchart specifically illustrating a procedure example of the power-off occurrence check process.
Step S130: First, the main control CPU 72 sets a condition for checking the occurrence of power interruption. This check condition can be set as an on-counter value for confirming that the main power-off detection signal is continuously output, for example.

  Step S132: Next, the main control CPU 72 reads the main power-off detection switch input port and confirms whether or not the main power-off detection signal is output (checks a specific bit). Although not particularly illustrated, the main power-off detection switch is mounted on the main controller 70, for example, and this main power-off detection switch monitors the drive voltage supplied from the power control unit 162, and the voltage level is monitored. When the voltage falls below the reference voltage, the main power-off detection signal is output. Note that the main power-off detection switch may be built in the power control unit 162. When the main control CPU 72 confirms that the main power-off detection signal is not output at this time (No), the main control CPU 72 exits this process and returns to the reset start process. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the main power-off detection signal is output (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S134.

  Step S134: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the above check conditions are satisfied. Specifically, for example, 1 is subtracted from the on-counter value set in the previous step S130, and it is confirmed whether or not the result is 0. If the on-counter value is not yet 0 at this time (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to step S132 and reconfirms the main power-off detection switch input port. When the check condition is satisfied by repeating the loop from step S134 to step S132 (step S134: Yes), the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S136.

  Step S136: The main control CPU 72 performs the test signal in addition to the output ports corresponding to the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 88, the first large prize opening solenoid 90, the second large prize opening solenoid 97, and the probability variation area solenoid 99 as described above. Clear the output port buffer corresponding to the terminal or command control signal.

Step S138, Step S140: Next, the main control CPU 72 adds the entire contents excluding the backup validity determination flag and the sum check buffer in the work area of the RAM 76 in units of 1 byte, and repeats until the addition is completed for all areas. .
Step S142: When the calculation of the sum is completed for all the areas (Step S140: Yes), the main control CPU 72 stores the sum result value in the sum check buffer.

Step S144: Next, the main control CPU 72 stores the valid value in the backup validity determination flag area as described above.
Step S146: Further, the main control CPU 72 stores “01H” indicating access prohibition in the protect value of the RAM 76, and prohibits access to the work area (including the use prohibition area and the stack area) of the RAM 76.
Step S148: Then, the main control CPU 72 enters a standby loop, and stops all other processes in preparation for shutting off the main power supply. After the main power is cut off, the backup power is supplied from a backup power circuit (not shown) (for example, a circuit including a capacitive element mounted on the main controller 70), so the stored contents of the RAM 76 are lost even after the main power is turned off. Held without. The backup power supply circuit may be incorporated in the power supply control unit 162, for example.

  Through the above processing, all the information stored in the work area of the RAM 76 to be backed up (sum added) is retained in the RAM 76 even after the main power is turned off. The stored memory is restored as backup information when the power is turned off after confirming the normality of the checksum in the previous reset start process (FIG. 7).

[Interrupt management processing (timer interrupt processing)]
Next, interrupt management processing (timer interrupt processing) will be described. FIG. 10 is a flowchart illustrating an exemplary procedure of interrupt management processing. The main control CPU 72 executes an interrupt management process every predetermined time (for example, several ms) based on the interrupt request signal from the counter / timer circuit. Each procedure will be described below.

  Step S200: First, the main control CPU 72 saves the values of the registers (accumulator A, flag register F, and general-purpose registers B to L) used during execution of the main loop in the save area of the RAM 76. Another value can be written in the registers (A to L) after the value is saved in the interrupt management process.

  Step S201: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a lottery random number update process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 updates the value of the counter for generating various random numbers for lottery. The value of each counter is incremented in the counter area of the RAM 76 and loops within a specified range. Various random numbers include, for example, jackpot symbol random numbers.

  Step S202: The main control CPU 72 executes the initial value update random number update process also here. The content of the process is the same as described above.

  Step S203: The main control CPU 72 executes input processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 inputs various switch signals from an input / output (I / O) port 79. Specifically, the passage detection signals from the gate switch 78, the probability changing area switch 95a and the discharge port switch 95b, the middle start winning port switch 80, the right starting winning port switch 82, the first count switch 84, and the second count switch 85. The input state (ON / OFF) of the winning detection signal from the first winning port switch 86 and the second winning port switch 81 is read.

  Step S203a: The main control CPU 72 executes security management processing. In this processing, the main control CPU 72 determines whether or not an illegal winning has occurred based on the input state (ON / OFF) of the winning detection signal read in the previous input processing (step S203), and excessive winning. It is determined whether or not the error has occurred. The main control CPU 72 also monitors for illegal acts by the magnetic detection sensor 202, the vibration detection sensor 204, and the radio wave detection sensor 206. If the main control CPU 72 determines that an illegal act has been executed, the main control CPU 72 generates an illegal error command. Note that the main control CPU 72 then executes the fraud handling process. The fraud handling process is, for example, a process of rewriting a bit of a winning detection signal due to an illegal win from ON to OFF, a process of generating a warning, or a process of game stop. The errors detected by the main control CPU 72 are mainly a magnetic error, door open error, panel switch error, illegal prize error, radio wave error, vibration error, big prize outlet abnormal discharge error, big prize prize entry and exit ball mismatch error There are a probability variation region abnormal passing error (high probability state transition region abnormal passage error), a probability variation region non-passing error (high probability state transition region non-passing error), and the like.

  Step S204: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes switch input event processing. In this process, among the switch signals input in the previous input process, the determination of an event occurring during the game is made based on the winning detection signals from the gate switch 78, the middle start winning opening switch 80, and the right starting winning opening switch 82. Depending on the event that occurred, further processing is executed. The specific contents of the switch input event process will be described later with reference to another flowchart.

  In this embodiment, when a winning detection signal (ON) is input from the middle start winning opening switch 80 or the right starting winning opening switch 82, the main control CPU 72 performs internal lottery corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol, respectively. It is determined that an event that triggers the event (lottery opportunity) has occurred. Further, when a passage detection signal (ON) is input from the gate switch 78, the main control CPU 72 determines that an event serving as a lottery trigger corresponding to the normal symbol has occurred. If it is determined that any event has occurred, the main control CPU 72 executes a process corresponding to each event. Note that processing executed when a winning detection signal is input from the middle start winning opening switch 80 or the right starting winning opening switch 82 will be described later with reference to another flowchart.

  Step S205, Step S206: The main control CPU 72 executes a special symbol game process and a normal symbol game process during the interrupt management process. These processes are for specifically proceeding with the game in the pachinko machine 1. Of these, in the special symbol game process (step S205), the main control CPU 72 controls the execution of the internal lottery corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol described above, or the first special symbol display device 34 and the second special symbol display device 34. 2 Controls the display of fluctuation and stop by the special symbol display device 35, and controls the operation of the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31 according to the display result. Details of the special symbol game process will be described later with reference to another flowchart.

  In the normal symbol game process (step S206), the main control CPU 72 controls the variable display and stop display by the normal symbol display device 33 described above, and operates the variable start winning device 28 according to the display result. Or control. For example, the main control CPU 72 stores a random number (ordinary random number per symbol) acquired in response to the passage of the start gate 20 in the previous switch input event processing (step S204). The random number value is read out from the memory, and it is determined whether or not it falls within a predetermined hit range (operation lottery execution means). When the random number value falls within the hit range, the normal symbol display device 33 displays the normal symbol in a variable manner, and after stopping the normal symbol in a predetermined hit state, the main control CPU 72 switches the normal electric accessory solenoid 88 on. Excitingly activates the variable start winning device 28 (movable piece actuating means). On the other hand, if the random number value is out of the hit range, the main control CPU 72 performs a normal symbol stop display in a manner of deviation after the variable display.

  Step S207: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes prize ball payout processing. In this process, based on the winning detection signals input from the various switches 80, 81, 82, 84, 85, 86 in the previous input process (step S203), a prize for instructing the payout control device 92 the number of winning balls. Output a ball command.

  Further, the main control CPU 72 outputs a prize ball content command for transmitting the contents of the number of prize balls to the effect control device 124 in the prize ball payout process. When a winning detection signal is input from the first count switch 84 or the second count switch 85 corresponding to the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31, it corresponds to the first profit (for 15 game balls). Generate a prize ball content command. Further, when a winning detection signal is input from the second winning opening switch 81 corresponding to the normal winning opening 24, a winning ball content command corresponding to the second profit (for 10 game balls) is generated. The prize ball content command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process (step S212 in FIG. 10).

[About the number of prize balls and number of game balls won]
The number of prize balls at the start port of the first special symbol and the number of prize balls at the start port of the second special symbol are each set to a specified number of one or more. In addition, the number of prize balls may be different between the start port of the first special symbol and the start port of the second special symbol. In addition, the minimum number of winning balls is set based on the winning probability of the special symbol and the expected value of the total number of game balls (the average number of balls that can be obtained during the period from the start to the end of the time reduction state) May be. Furthermore, the winning probability of special symbols, the expected number of game balls won, the number of opening of the big prize opening, the opening time of the big winning opening, the maximum number of winning of the big winning opening, the number of winning balls of the big winning opening are predetermined. When the condition is satisfied, a big hit may be set such that the number of game balls acquired by one big hit is less than 1/4 of the maximum number of acquired game balls.

  Step S208: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes external information processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sends the above-mentioned external information signals (for example, prize ball information, door opening information, symbol determination number information, jackpot information, start port information, etc.) to the hall computer of the game hall through the external terminal board 160. Store in port output request buffer.

Further, the main control CPU 72 determines that a security signal (external) is being detected through the external terminal board 160 when the special winning opening entrance / exit ball mismatch error flag is ON or when the probability variation area abnormal passing error flag is ON. (Information signal) is output.
Here, the prize winning / entrance ball inconsistency error flag and the probability variation area abnormal passage error flag are forcibly cleared to zero when the power is turned off after power is turned off regardless of whether the RAM is cleared or not. The output of the security signal (external information signal) indicating that it is in the middle stops when the power is turned off.

  In this embodiment, among the various external information signals, for example, “big hit 1” to “big hit 5” are output to the outside as jackpot information, so that an external electronic device (data display) connected to the pachinko machine 1 is displayed. Various jackpot information can be provided (external information signal output means). In other words, the jackpot information is divided into a plurality of “big hit 1” to “big hit 5” and output, so that the type of jackpot (winning type) from these combinations can be tabulated and managed by a hall computer (not shown) or internal Recognize changes in the probability state (low probability state or high probability state) or shortened state of symbol variation time, or generate a small hit (a hit where the condition device does not work) that is not classified as a “big hit” even if it is not winning Can be aggregated and managed. Based on the jackpot information, for example, a data display device (not shown) counts and displays the number of jackpot occurrences within the past several business days for each pachinko machine 1, and recognizes whether or not each jackpot is currently hit Or can recognize whether or not each symbol is currently in a shortened state of the symbol variation time. In this external information processing, the main control CPU 72 controls each output state (set of ON or OFF) of “big hit 1” to “big hit 5” in detail.

  Step S209: Further, the main control CPU 72 executes test signal processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 generates various test signals representing its internal state (for example, normal symbol game management state, special symbol game management state, jackpot, probability variation function in operation, time reduction function in operation). These are stored in the port output request buffer. With this test signal, for example, the internal state of the main control CPU 72 can be tested outside the main controller 70.

  Step S210: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes display output management processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 performs the normal symbol display device 33, the normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a, the first special symbol display device 34, the second special symbol display device 35, the first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a, and the second special symbol. The lighting state of the operation memory lamp 35a, the game state display device 38, etc. is controlled. Specifically, the drive signal stored in the port output request buffer is output to the port in the previous special symbol game process (step S205) or the normal symbol game process (step S206). The drive signal is stored in the port output request buffer as byte data to be applied to each LED. As a result, each LED is driven in a predetermined display mode (a mode of performing symbol variation display, stop display, working memory number display, game state display, etc.).

  Step S211: The main control CPU 72 executes output management processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 outputs the external information signal (byte data) stored in the port output request buffer in the previous external information processing (step S208). Further, the main control CPU 72 drives each of the drive signals of the normal electric accessory solenoid 88, the first large prize opening solenoid 90, the second large prize opening solenoid 97, and the probability variation area solenoid 99 stored in the port output request buffer, and the test. Output the port with the signal etc.

  Step S212: The main control CPU 72 executes an effect control output process. In this processing, it is confirmed whether or not there is a command (command necessary for presentation control) that the main control CPU 72 should transmit to the presentation control device 124 in the command buffer. Output port.

  Step S213: The main control CPU 72 clears the port output request buffer stored by the current CTC interrupt.

  In the present embodiment, an example is given in which the processing (game control program module) in steps S205 to S212 is executed as a timer interrupt processing. However, these processing are incorporated in the main loop of the CPU and executed. There are also known programming examples.

  Step S214: When the above processing is completed, the main control CPU 72 stores a value (01H) for designating the end of interrupt in the interrupt program counter, and ends the CTC interrupt.

  Step S215, Step S216: Then, the main control CPU 72 restores the saved values of the registers (A to L) and permits the next CTC interrupt. Thereafter, the main control CPU 72 returns to the main loop (program address indicated by the stack pointer).

[Switch input event processing]
FIG. 11 and FIG. 12 are flowcharts showing a procedure example of the switch input event process (step S204 in FIG. 10). Each procedure will be described below.

  Step S10: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not a winning detection signal is input (a lottery opportunity is generated) from the middle start winning opening switch 80 corresponding to the first special symbol. When the input of the winning detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S11 and executes the first special symbol memory update process. Specific processing contents will be further described later using another flowchart. On the other hand, when no winning detection signal is input (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S12.

  Step S12: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not a winning detection signal is input (a lottery opportunity is generated) from the right start winning port switch 82 corresponding to the second special symbol. When the input of the winning detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S13 and executes the second special symbol memory update process. Here again, the details of the specific processing will be further described later using another flowchart. On the other hand, when no winning detection signal is input (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S14.

  Step S14: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not a winning detection signal is input from the first count switch 84 corresponding to the first big winning opening of the first variable winning device 30. When the input of this winning detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S15 and executes the first big winning mouth count process. In the first grand prize winning count process, the main control CPU 72 counts the number of winning balls to the first variable prize winning device 30 for each round during the big hit game. On the other hand, if there is no input of a winning detection signal (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S16.

  Step S16: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not a winning detection signal is input from the second count switch 85 corresponding to the second big winning opening of the second variable winning device 31. When the input of the winning detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S17 and executes the second big winning mouth count process. In the second grand prize winning count process, the main control CPU 72 counts the number of winning balls to the second variable prize winning device 31 during the big hit game. On the other hand, if there is no input of a winning detection signal (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S18.

  Step S18: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not a passage detection signal is input from the gate switch 78 corresponding to the normal symbol. When the input of the passage detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S19 and executes the normal symbol memory update process. In the normal symbol memory update process, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current number of normal symbol working memories is less than the upper limit number (for example, 4), and if it does not reach the upper limit number, obtains a random number per normal symbol To do. Further, the main control CPU 72 increments the normal symbol operation memory number by one. Then, the main control CPU 72 stores the acquired random value per normal symbol in the random number storage area of the RAM 76. On the other hand, if there is no input of a winning detection signal (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S20.

Step S20: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not a detection signal is input from the probability change area switch 95a corresponding to the probability change area provided in the second variable winning device 31. When the input of this detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S21 and executes the process at the time of passing through the probability changing area switch. In the process at the time of passing through the probability change area switch, for example, a process at the time of passing through the probability change area is executed, or an error process related to the probability change area is executed. Specific processing contents will be further described later using another flowchart. On the other hand, when the detection signal is not input (No), the main control CPU 72 does not execute the process at the time of passing through the probability changing area switch.
When the above procedure is executed, the main control CPU 72 executes the process shown in FIG. 12 (connection symbol B → B).

  Step S22: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not a detection signal is input from the discharge port switch 95b corresponding to the discharge region of the second variable winning device 31. When the input of this detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S23. On the other hand, when the input of the detection signal is not confirmed (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the interrupt management process (FIG. 10).

  Step S23: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value of the second variable prize-winning device entry / exit counter is zero. The second variable winning device entry / exit counter is stored in the RAM 76, and 0 is set as the initial value. Thereby, the main control CPU 72 is in an abnormal discharge error state when the passage of the game ball is detected by the discharge port switch 95b even though the passage of the game ball is not detected by the second count switch 85. The determination regarding the abnormal discharge error state can be executed regardless of whether or not the big hit game is executed (abnormal discharge error state determination means). Further, the main control CPU 72 determines the passage of the game ball by the second count switch 85 and the passage of the game ball by the discharge port switch 95b using one counter.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the value of the second variable prize-winning device entry / exit counter is 0 (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S24. On the other hand, when it is not possible to confirm that the value of the second variable prize winning device entry / exit counter is 0 (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S25.

  Step S24: The main control CPU 72 executes a special winning opening abnormal discharge error setting process. The details of the special winning opening abnormal discharge error setting process will be described later.

  Step S25: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of subtracting 1 from the value of the second variable prize-winning device entry / exit counter.

  When the above processing is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the interrupt management processing (FIG. 10).

  FIG. 13 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of processing when the probability variation region switch passes. Each procedure will be described below.

  Step S302: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value of the second variable prize-winning device entry / exit ball counter is zero. Thus, at the end of each round game, the number of winning balls detected by the second count switch 85, the number of gaming balls detected by the probability changing area switch 95a, and the outlet switch 95b are detected. It is possible to confirm whether or not the number of discharged balls, which is the total number of played game balls, matches (incoming / outgoing ball mismatch error state determination means). When the value of the second variable winning device entry / exit counter is 0, the main control CPU 72 can determine that the number of winning balls does not match the number of discharged balls, and the value of the second variable winning device entry / exit counter is If it is other than 0, it can be determined that the number of winning balls and the number of discharged balls coincide at this stage (incoming / outgoing ball mismatch error state determination means). In this way, the main control CPU 72 calculates the number of winning balls and the number of discharged balls using one counter (second variable winning device entering / exiting counter).

  Further, the main control CPU 72 determines that the abnormal discharge error state is detected when the passage of the game ball is detected by the probability variation area switch 95a even though the passage of the game ball is not detected by the second count switch 85. In addition, regardless of whether or not the big hit game is being executed, it is possible to execute the determination regarding the abnormal discharge error state (abnormal discharge error state determination means). Further, the main control CPU 72 determines the passage of the game ball by the second count switch 85 and the passage of the game ball by the probability variation area switch 95a using one counter.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the value of the second variable prize-winning device entry / exit counter is 0 (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S304. On the other hand, when it is not possible to confirm that the value of the second variable winning device entry / exit counter is 0 (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S306.

  Step S304: The main control CPU 72 executes a special winning opening abnormal discharge error setting process. The details of the special winning opening abnormal discharge error setting process will be described later.

  Step S306: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of subtracting 1 from the value of the second variable prize-winning device entry / exit counter.

  Step S308: The main control CPU 72 executes a probability variation area valid state determination process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current state is a state in which the probability variation area is valid. The probability variation area valid state can be, for example, during the opening of the big winning opening of the second variable winning device 31 and during the closing effective period of the big winning port of the second variable winning device 31. Note that the probability variation area valid state may be only during the opening of the big winning opening of the second variable winning device 31. The game state may be confirmed by referring to the special game management status, or may be confirmed using a predetermined timer.

  Step S310: When it is confirmed that the current state is not the probability variation region valid state as a result of the probability variation region valid state determination process (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S312 and the current state is the probability variation region valid state. If it is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the switch input event process (FIG. 11).

  Step S312: The main control CPU 72 executes a probability variation area passing error target round determination process. The details of the probability variation area passing error target round determination process will be described later. By executing this process, the determination loop count and the open round identification value are set. In the determination loop count, a value indicating how many times the error processing related to the probability variation area is executed is stored, and in the open round identification value, a value of “1 (short open)” or “2 (long open)” is stored. The

  Step S314: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the value of the determination loop count is zero. Thereby, it is possible to confirm whether or not the error processing determination loop has ended.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the value of the determination loop count is 0 (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S322, assuming that the error processing determination loop has ended. On the other hand, if it cannot be confirmed that the value of the determination loop count is 0 (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S316 on the assumption that the error processing determination loop has not ended.

  Step S316: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether the value of the open round identification value is 1 or not.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the value of the open round identification value is not 1 (long open) (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S322. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the open round identification value is 1 (short open) (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S318.

As described above, by executing the processing of step S316, the main control CPU 72 makes it difficult for the second variable winning device 31 (probability variation area) to open the short circuit and the game ball to pass through the probability variation area. Nevertheless, it is possible to confirm whether or not the passing of the game ball is detected by the probability variation area switch 95a (high probability state transition area abnormal passage error state determination means).
Further, the main control CPU 72 can determine that the passing of the game ball has been detected by the probability variation area switch 95a when the probability variation area passing process is being executed, and is not executing the probability variation area passing process. In this case, it can be determined that the passing of the game ball has not been detected by the probability variation area switch 95a (high probability state transition area abnormal passage error state determination means).

  Step S318: The main control CPU 72 executes processing for turning on the probability variation region abnormal passage error flag. This flag is set to OFF by forced zero clear processing at the time of power failure recovery.

  Step S320: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of generating a probability variation region abnormal passage error occurrence designation command (high probability state transition region abnormal passage error state occurrence information). The command generated here is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process (step S212 in FIG. 10).

  Step S322: The main control CPU 72 executes processing for turning on the special symbol probability state preliminary flag. The reason for turning on the reserve flag is that the special symbol probability state flag is not turned on until the jackpot game is over.

  When the above processing is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the switch input event processing (FIG. 11).

  FIG. 14 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of the probability variation area passing error target round determination process. Each procedure will be described below.

  Step S330: The main control CPU 72 executes a symbol offset acquisition process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 executes a process of acquiring an offset value (a value for calculation) based on the symbol type based on a probability variation area passing error target round determination data table to be described later.

  Step S332: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of setting the address of the probability variation area passing error target round determination data table. In this process, the main control CPU 72 executes a process of setting any address in the probability variation area passing error target round determination data tables 1 to 3 described later.

  Step S334: The main control CPU 72 executes a double byte selection process. By executing this processing, the main control CPU 72 acquires data for 2 bytes (target round determination value data and open round identification value data) from the address set in the previous step S332. be able to.

  Step S336: The main control CPU 72 executes processing for loading the special electric accessory continuous operation number counter (continuous operation number status). By executing this processing, the main control CPU 72 can confirm the current number of rounds (how many rounds are present).

  Step S338: The main control CPU 72 executes processing for loading the determination loop count. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 executes a process of loading the determination loop count from the address set in the previous step S332.

For example, when the number of determination loops is loaded from the probability variation region passing error target round determination data table 1 to be described later, the value of determination loop number = 3 is obtained from the calculation formula of (@ D_KRE_JDG_1-D_KRE_JDG_1-1) / 2.
Further, when the number of determination loops is loaded from the probability variation region passing error target round determination data table 2 described later, the value of determination loop number = 1 is obtained from the calculation formula of (@ D_KRE_JDG_2−D_KRE_JDG_2−1) / 2.
Further, when the number of determination loops is loaded from the probability variation region passing error target round determination data table 3 to be described later, the value of determination loop number = 1 is obtained from the calculation formula of (@ D_KRE_JDG_3-D_KRE_JDG_3-1) / 2.

  Step S340: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of adding 1 to the address of the data table. Thereby, for example, when referring to the probability variation area passing error target round determination data table 1 described later, the address of the reference destination advances by one and shifts to the position of “DB 7”.

  Step S342: The main control CPU 72 executes processing for comparing the target round determination value with the special electric accessory continuous operation number counter. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 matches the target round determination value referred to in the previous step S340 and the value of the special electric accessory continuous operation number counter loaded in the previous step S336. Confirm whether or not.

  Step S346: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of adding 1 to the address of the data table. Thereby, for example, when referring to the probability variation area passing error target round determination data table 1 to be described later, the address of the reference destination advances by one and moves to the position of “DB 1”.

  Step S348: The main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the current round corresponds to the target round. Specifically, a process for referring to the comparison process in the previous step S342 is executed.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the target round determination value and the special electric accessory continuous operation number counter match (Yes), the main control CPU 72 determines that the current round corresponds to the target round, and the main control CPU 72 determines the probability change area switch. The process returns to the passing process (FIG. 13). On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the target round determination value and the special electric accessory continuous operation number counter do not match (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S350 on the assumption that the current round does not correspond to the target round. To do.

  Step S350: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of subtracting 1 from the number of determination loops. For example, when the number of determination loops is 3, the number of determination loops is updated to 2.

  Step S352: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the value of the determination loop count is zero.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the value of the number of determination loops is 0 (Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the process at the time of passing through the probability changing area switch (FIG. 13). On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that the value of the determination loop count is 0 (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to step S340 and repeatedly executes the processing so far.

[Round judgment data table for probability variation area passing error]
FIG. 15 is a diagram illustrating a program example of the probability variation area passing error target round determination data table. In this program example, offset values are described for probability variation region passing error target round determination data tables 1 to 3 described later. In the illustrated program example, “DB” indicates that 1-byte data is stored, and “;” indicates that the subsequent sentence is a comment sentence.

  First, “D_KRE_JDG:” of the address 1000H is a label indicating the head address of the probability variation area passing error target round determination data table. When the main control CPU 72 executes this address, the probability variation area passing error target round determination data table is Referenced.

  Here, since “D_KRE_JDG” is a label indicating the head of the table and not data, it has the same address as “DB D_KRE_JDG_1- $” which is the next data. As described above, the address of the label indicating the head of the table or the label indicating the end of the table is the same address as the address of the next data (hereinafter the same). Note that the address values displayed in the figure are merely examples, and other address values may be used.

  “D_KRE_JDG — 1- $” of the next address 1000H represents an offset value up to the probability variation area passing error target round determination data table 1. Specifically, since the current address 1000H is entered in “$”, it indicates that 03H (1003H-1000H) is actually recorded.

  “D_KRE_JDG — 2- $” of the next address 1001H represents an offset value up to the probability variation area passing error target round determination data table 2. Specifically, since the current address 1001H is entered in “$”, it indicates that 09H (100AH-1001H) is actually recorded.

  “D_KRE_JDG — 3-$” of the next address 1002H represents an offset value up to the probability variation area passing error target round determination data table 3. Specifically, since the current address 1002H is entered in “$”, it indicates that 0 BH (100DH-1002H) is substantially recorded.

[Round judgment data table 1 for probability variation area passing error]
FIG. 16 is a diagram illustrating a program example of the probability variation area passing error target round determination data table 1. In this program example, the number of determination loops, the target round determination value, and the open round identification value used in the case of corresponding to symbol type 1 (non-probability variable symbol: 9 round symbol 1) are described.

  First, “D_KRE_JDG1:” of the address 1003H is a label indicating the head address of the probability variation area passing error target round determination data table 1, and the main control CPU 72 executes this address, whereby the probability variation area passing error target round determination data table. 1 is referred to.

  "(@ D_KRE_JDG_1-D_KRE_JDG1-1) / 2" of the next address 1003H represents the value of the determination loop count. In practice, 03H ((100AH-1003H-1) / 2) is recorded. Note that “@ D_KRE_JDG_1” in the last line is used as a label, and the address value is 100 AH.

  “7” of the next address 1004H indicates a target round determination value, and “1” of the next address 1005H indicates an open round identification value. Substantially, the 7th round in the case of 9-round symbol 1 indicates that the second variable winning device 31 is short-circuited.

  “8” of the next address 1006H indicates a target round determination value, and “1” of the next address 1007H indicates an open round identification value. Substantially, the second variable winning device 31 is short-opened in the eighth round when it corresponds to the nine-round symbol 1.

  “9” of the next address 1008H indicates the target round determination value, and “1” of the next address 1009H indicates the open round identification value. Substantially, the 9th round in the case of 9 round symbol 1 indicates that the second variable winning device 31 is short-circuited.

  As described above, the probability variable region passing error target round determination data table 1 includes the second variable winning device 31 for the seventh to ninth rounds at the time of winning the ninth round symbol 1 which is a target for determining the probability variable region abnormal passing error state. It is a table that prescribes for error determination that (probability change area) is short-circuit open (error determination variable winning device operation pattern defining means). The main control CPU 72 executes the determination regarding the probability variation region abnormal passing error state with reference to the probability variation region passing error target round determination data table 1 when the nine round symbol 1 is won (high probability state transition region abnormal passage error state). Determination means).

  In addition, when the 9-round symbol 1 is won, the second variable winning device 31 (probability variation area) is short-circuited from 7 to 9 rounds, so the main control CPU 72 performs all rounds from 7 to 9 rounds. Then, a determination regarding the probability variation region abnormal passage error state is executed (high probability state transition region abnormal passage error state determination means).

[Round determination data table 2 for probability variation area passing error]
FIG. 17 is a diagram illustrating a program example of the probability variation area passing error target round determination data table 2. In this program example, the number of determination loops, the target round determination value, and the open round identification value used in the case of corresponding to symbol type 2 (probability variable symbol 1: 9 round symbol 2) are described.

  First, “D_KRE_JDG2:” of the address 100AH is a label indicating the head address of the probability variation area passing error target round determination data table 2, and the main control CPU 72 executes this address, thereby allowing the probability variation area passing error target round determination data table. 2 is referred to.

  "(@ D_KRE_JDG_2-D_KRE_JDG2-1) / 2" of the next address 100AH represents the value of the determination loop count. In practice, 01H ((100DH-100AH-1) / 2) is recorded. Note that “@ D_KRE_JDG_2” on the last line is used as a label, and the address value is 100 DH.

  “7” of the next address 100BH indicates a target round determination value, and “2” of the next address 100CH indicates an open round identification value. Substantially, the 7th round in the case of 9 round symbol 2 indicates that the second variable winning device 31 is long open.

  Thus, the probability variable area passing error target round determination data table 2 is the second variable winning device 31 (probability changing area) for the seventh round when the 9 round symbol 2 winning is determined as a target for determining the probability variable area non-passing error state. Is a table that prescribes that an error is released for error determination (error determination variable winning device operation pattern defining means). Then, the main control CPU 72 refers to the probability variation area passing error target round determination data table 2 when the 9 round symbol 2 is selected, and performs a determination regarding the probability variation area non-passing error state (high probability state transition area non-passing error state) Determination means).

  In addition, regarding the 9-round symbol 2 winning, the second variable prize-winning device 31 (probability variation area) is long open for 7 rounds and short open is for 8 rounds and 9 rounds. For the 8th and 9th rounds, the determination regarding the probability variation region abnormal passage error state is not executed (high probability state transition region abnormal passage error state determination means).

[Probability variation area passing error target round judgment data table 3]
FIG. 18 is a diagram illustrating a program example of the probability variation area passing error target round determination data table 3. In this program example, the number of determination loops, the target round determination value, and the open round identification value used when the symbol type 3 (probability variation symbol 2: 16 round symbol) is applicable are described.

  First, “D_KRE_JDG3:” at the address 100DH is a label indicating the head address of the probability variation area passing error target round determination data table 3, and the main control CPU 72 executes this address, thereby allowing the probability variation area passing error target round determination data table. 3 is referred to.

  "(@ D_KRE_JDG_3-D_KRE_JDG3-1) / 2" of the next address 100DH represents the value of the determination loop count. In practice, 01H ((1010H-100DH-1) / 2) is recorded. Note that “@D_KRE_JDG — 3” on the last line is used as a label, and the value of the address is 1010H.

  “9” of the next address 100EH indicates a target round determination value, and “2” of the next address 100FH indicates an open round identification value. Substantially, the 9th round in the case of the 9 round symbol 2 indicates that the second variable winning device 31 is long open.

  As described above, the probability variable area passing error target round determination data table 3 indicates that the second variable winning device 31 (probability changing area) is the ninth round when the 16-round symbol winning that is the target for determining the probability variable area non-passing error state. It is a table that prescribes to open for long for error determination (error determination variable winning device operation pattern defining means). Then, when the 16-round symbol is won, the main control CPU 72 refers to the probability variation region passing error target round determination data table 3 and performs a determination regarding the probability variation region non-passing error state (high probability state transition region non-passing error state determination). means).

  In addition, when the 16-round symbol is won, the second variable winning device 31 (probability change area) opens 7 rounds, 8 rounds, and 9 rounds. The determination regarding the probability variation area non-passing error state is performed in the last nine rounds without executing the determination regarding the non-passing error state (high probability state transition area non-passing error state determination means).

  FIG. 19 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of the special winning opening abnormal discharge error setting process. Each procedure will be described below.

  Step S360: The main control CPU 72 executes a process for setting the address of the security timer setting ram set table. In this process, a process for acquiring a time during which an external information signal is continuously transmitted is executed with reference to a security timer setting ram set table (not shown).

  Step S362: The main control CPU 72 executes a ram set process. By executing this processing, the main control CPU 72 transmits the transmission time (eg, for example) obtained in the previous step S360 to the hall computer in the game hall through the external terminal board 160 in the external information processing (step S208 in FIG. 10). An external information signal (security information) can be transmitted for 30 seconds).

  Step S364: The main control CPU 72 executes a process for generating a special winning opening abnormal discharge error occurrence designation command. The command generated here is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process (step S212 in FIG. 10).

  When the above processing is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the switch input event processing (FIG. 12) or the probability change region switch passing processing (FIG. 13).

[First special symbol memory update process]
FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the first special symbol memory update process (step S11 in FIG. 11). Hereinafter, the procedure of the first special symbol memory update process will be described in order.

  Step S30: First, the main control CPU 72 refers to the value of the first special symbol working memory number counter to check whether or not the working memory number is less than the maximum value (for example, 4). The working memory number counter represents the number (the number of sets) of big hit determination random numbers and big hit symbol random numbers stored in the random number storage area of the RAM 76. Here, the random number storage area of the RAM 76 is divided into eight sections (for example, 2 bytes each) used in common for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and each section has a big hit decision random number and a big hit symbol. Random numbers can be stored one by one. At this time, if the value of the working memory number counter corresponding to the first special symbol has reached the maximum value (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the switch input event processing (FIG. 11). On the other hand, if the value of the working memory number counter is less than the maximum value (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S31.

  Step S31: The main control CPU 72 adds one first special symbol working memory number. The first special symbol operation memory number counter is stored, for example, in the operation memory number area of the RAM 76, and the main control CPU 72 increments (+1) the value. Based on the counter value added here, the lighting state of the first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a is controlled in the display output management process (step S210 in FIG. 10).

  Step S32: The main control CPU 72 acquires a jackpot determination random number value corresponding to the first special symbol from the random number generator 75 through the sampling circuit 77 (acquisition of first lottery element, lottery element acquisition means). The random value is acquired by specifying the pin address of the random number generator 75. In the case where the main control CPU 72 performs 8-bit processing, the address designation is performed twice for each upper byte and lower byte. When the main control CPU 72 reads the jackpot determination random number value from the designated address, the main control CPU 72 saves it at the transfer destination address as a jackpot determination random number corresponding to the first special symbol.

  Step S33: Next, the main control CPU 72 acquires a jackpot symbol random number value corresponding to the first special symbol from the jackpot symbol random number counter area of the RAM 76. The acquisition of the random number value is also performed by designating the address of the jackpot symbol random number counter area. When the main control CPU 72 reads the jackpot symbol random number value from the designated address, the main control CPU 72 saves it at the transfer destination address as a jackpot symbol random number corresponding to the first special symbol.

  Step S34: Also, the main control CPU 72 sequentially acquires a reach determination random number and a variation pattern determination random number from the variation random number counter area of the RAM 76 as a random value related to the variation condition of the first special symbol (variation pattern determination element acquisition). means). Similarly, these random number values are acquired by designating the address of the random number counter area for variation. Then, when the main control CPU 72 acquires the reach determination random number and the variation pattern determination random number from the designated address, it saves them in the transfer destination address.

  Step S35: The main control CPU 72 transfers the saved jackpot determination random number, jackpot symbol random number, reach determination random number, and variation pattern determination random number to the random number storage area corresponding to the first special symbol, and these random numbers in the empty section in the area Are stored as a set (storage means, lottery element storage means). The order (for example, first to fourth) is set in the plurality of sections. If all the first to fourth sections are empty at this stage, the random numbers are stored in order from the first section. Alternatively, if the first section is already filled and the other second to fourth sections are empty, the random numbers are stored in order from the second section. Note that the random number storage area is read out in a FIFO (First In First Out) format.

  Step S36: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current special game management status (game state) is a big hit. If it is not during the big hit (No), the main control CPU 72 executes the following steps S37 and S38. If it is a big hit (Yes), the main control CPU 72 skips steps S37 and S38 and proceeds to step S38a. The reason why this determination is made in the present embodiment is that the effect of pre-reading is not performed for the incoming ball generated during the big hit.

  Step S37: When the jackpot is not a big hit (Step S36: No), the main control CPU 72 executes an effect determination process at the time of acquisition for the first special symbol. This process determines the result of the internal lottery in advance (before the start of fluctuation) based on the jackpot determination random number and the jackpot symbol random number of the first special symbol respectively acquired in the previous steps S32 to S34, and thereby the production contents This is for determination (so-called “look ahead”). The specific processing contents will be described later with reference to another flowchart.

  Step S38: After returning from the at-acquisition effect determination process, the main control CPU 72 next sets the upper bytes (for example, “B8H”) of the special figure destination determination effect command for the first special symbol. This high-order byte data describes that the command type is “for special figure destination determination effect relating to the first special symbol”. Since the lower byte of the special figure destination determination effect command is set in the previous acquisition effect determination process (step S37), the upper byte is combined with the lower byte, for example. Will be generated.

  Step S38a: Next, the main control CPU 72 sets an effect command at the time of increasing the number of working memories regarding the first special symbol. Specifically, for the preceding value (for example, “BBH”) of the upper byte representing the type of command, a 1-word length in which the increased number of working memories (for example, “01H” to “04H”) is added to the lower byte. A production command is generated. At this time, for the lower byte, the second place is set to “0” by default to indicate that the value is “result (change information) due to increase in number of working memories”. That is, if the lower byte is “01H”, it indicates that the current working memory number has become “01H” as a result of increasing by one from the previous working memory number “00H”. Similarly, if the lower byte is “02H” to “04H”, it is increased by one from the previous working memory numbers “01H” to “03H”, so that the current working memory number is “02H” to “02H”. 04H ". The preceding value “BBH” is a value indicating that the current effect command is the working memory number command for the first special symbol.

  Step S39: The main control CPU 72 executes an effect command output setting process for the first special symbol. This process is for transmitting the special figure destination determination effect command generated in the previous step S38, the effect command for increasing the number of working memories generated in step S38a, and the start opening winning tone control command to the effect control device 124. (Memory number notification means).

  When the above procedure is completed or the first special symbol operation memory number has reached 4 (step S30: No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the switch input event process (FIG. 11).

[Second special symbol memory update process]
Next, FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the second special symbol memory update process (step S13 in FIG. 11). Hereinafter, the procedure of the second special symbol memory update process will be described in order.

  Step S40: The main control CPU 72 refers to the value of the second special symbol working memory number counter to check whether or not the working memory number is less than the maximum value. Similarly to the above, the second special symbol actuated memory number counter represents the number (number of sets) of jackpot determination random numbers and jackpot symbol random numbers stored in the random number storage area of the RAM 76. At this time, if the value of the second special symbol operation memory number counter reaches the maximum value (for example, 4) (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the switch input event process (FIG. 11). On the other hand, if the value of the second special symbol operation memory number counter is still less than the maximum value (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S41 and thereafter.

  Step S41: The main control CPU 72 increments the second special symbol working memory number by one (increments the value of the second special symbol working memory number counter). Similarly to the previous step S31 (FIG. 20), the lighting state of the second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a is controlled by the display output management process (step S210 in FIG. 10) based on the counter value added here. Will be.

  Step S42: The main control CPU 72 acquires a jackpot determination random number value corresponding to the second special symbol from the random number generator 75 through the sampling circuit 77 (acquisition of second lottery element, lottery element acquisition means). The method for acquiring the random number value is the same as step S32 (FIG. 20) described above.

  Step S43: Next, the main control CPU 72 acquires a jackpot symbol random number value corresponding to the second special symbol from the jackpot symbol random number counter area of the RAM 76. The method for acquiring the random value is the same as that in step S33 (FIG. 20) described above.

  Step S44: Also, the main control CPU 72 sequentially acquires a reach determination random number and a variation pattern determination random number regarding the variation condition of the second special symbol from the variation random number counter area of the RAM 76 (variation pattern determination element acquisition means). The acquisition of these random values is also performed in the same manner as step S34 (FIG. 20) described above.

  Step S45: The main control CPU 72 transfers the saved jackpot determination random number, jackpot symbol random number, reach determination random number, and variation pattern determination random number to the random number storage area corresponding to the second special symbol, and these random numbers in the empty section in the area Are stored as a set (storage means). The storage method is the same as step S35 (FIG. 20) described above.

  Step S45a: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current game management status (game state) is a big hit. If it is not a big hit (No), the main control CPU 72 executes the following steps S46 and S47. Conversely, if it is a big hit (Yes), the main control CPU 72 skips steps S46 and S47 and proceeds to step S48. The reason why this determination is made in the present embodiment is that the effect of pre-reading is not performed for the same incoming ball that occurred during the big hit.

  Step S46: When it is other than big hit (step S45a: No), next, the main control CPU 72 executes an effect determination process at the time of acquisition for the second special symbol. This process determines the result of the internal lottery in advance (before the start of the change) based on the big hit determination random number and the big hit symbol random number of the second special symbol obtained in the previous steps S42 to S44, respectively, It is for judging. The specific processing contents will be described later.

  Step S47: After returning from the effect determination process at the time of acquisition, the main control CPU 72 sets the upper byte (for example, “B9H”) of the special figure destination determination effect command. This high-order byte data describes that the command type is “for special figure destination determination effect relating to the second special symbol”. Similarly, since the lower byte of the special figure destination determination effect command is set in the previous effect determination processing at the time of acquisition (step S46), for example, one word is synthesized by combining the upper byte with the lower byte. A long command will be generated.

  Step S48: Next, the main control CPU 72 sets an effect command for increasing the number of working memories with respect to the second special symbol. Here, a one-word-length production command in which the increased number of working memories (for example, “01H” to “04H”) is added to the lower byte with respect to the preceding value (for example, “BCH”) representing the command type. Is generated. Similarly, for the second special symbol, the second place of the lower byte is set to “0” by default to indicate that the value is “a result of an increase in the number of working memories (change information)”. it can. The preceding value “BCH” is a value indicating that the current effect command is a working memory number command for the second special symbol.

  Step S49: The main control CPU 72 executes an effect command output setting process for the second special symbol. As a result, preparation for transmitting a special figure destination determination effect command, an effect command when increasing the number of operating memories, a start opening winning sound control command, and the like regarding the second special symbol to the effect control device 124 is performed (memory number notifying means). . When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the switch input event process (FIG. 11).

[Acquisition process during acquisition]
FIG. 22 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of the effect determination process at the time of acquisition. The main control CPU 72 performs this acquisition effect determination process in the first special symbol memory update process and the second special symbol memory update process (step S37 in FIG. 20 and step S46 in FIG. 21) (predetermined determination). Execution means). As described above, this processing is executed for each of the first special symbol (when entering the middle start winning opening 26) and the second special symbol (when entering the variable start winning device 28). Therefore, the following description may correspond to a process related to the first special symbol and a process related to the second special symbol. Hereinafter, the contents of the processing will be described along each procedure.

  Step S50: The main control CPU 72 sets the lower byte (for example, “00H”) of the special figure destination determination effect command (point determination information). The byte data set here represents the standard value of the command (at the time of loss).

  Step S52: Next, the main control CPU 72 loads the jackpot determination random number as the first determination random value. The random numbers to be loaded here are those stored in the RAM 76 in the first special symbol memory update process (step S35 in FIG. 20) or the second special symbol memory update process (step S45 in FIG. 21). .

  Step S54: Then, the main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the loaded random number is outside the range of the winning value (here, the lower limit value or less) (lottery result destination determination means, prior determination means). Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets a comparison value (lower limit value) in the A register, and subtracts the loaded random number value from this comparison value. The comparison value (lower limit value) is defined in advance according to the winning probability of the internal lottery in the pachinko machine 1. Next, the main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the calculation result is 0 or a positive value from the value of the flag register, for example. As a result, if the loaded random number is outside the range of the winning value (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S80.

  Step S80: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a variation pattern information preliminary determination process at the time of deviation (variation pattern destination determination means). In this process, the main control CPU 72 generates the variation pattern destination determination command described above for the variation time at the time of disconnection. In the variation pattern destination determination command generated here, prior determination information regarding the variation time (or variation pattern number) particularly when the “time reduction function” is activated is reflected. For example, if the current state is when the “time reduction function” is activated, the main control CPU 72 corresponds to the “out-of-reach fluctuation fluctuation (non-shortening fluctuation time)” based on the loaded reach determination random number. Judge whether there is. As a result, when the fluctuation time corresponds to “outlier reach fluctuation (non-shortening fluctuation time)”, the main control CPU 72 generates a fluctuation pattern destination determination command corresponding to “short-time / non-shortening fluctuation time”. In the case of reach variation, it is also possible to determine a “reach group (type of reach)” from the reach mode random number and generate a variation pattern destination determination command from the result. On the other hand, when the fluctuation time does not correspond to the “outlier reach fluctuation (non-shortening fluctuation time)”, the main control CPU 72 generates a fluctuation pattern destination determination command corresponding to the “short / mid-shortening fluctuation time”. Alternatively, if the current state is when the “time reduction function” is inactive (low probability state), the main control CPU 72 corresponds to the “normally out of reach reach fluctuation” based on the loaded reach determination random number. It is determined whether or not. As a result, when the fluctuation time corresponds to “normally deviation reach fluctuation”, the main control CPU 72 generates a fluctuation pattern destination determination command corresponding to “normally deviation reach fluctuation time”. On the other hand, when the fluctuation time does not correspond to “normally deviation reach fluctuation”, the main control CPU 72 generates a fluctuation pattern destination determination command corresponding to “normal deviation fluctuation time”. Further, the variation pattern destination determination command generated here is set in the transmission buffer in the effect command output setting process (steps S39 and S49) as described above. In this process, the main control CPU 72 may generate a change pattern destination determination command for the change pattern at the time of small hit, similarly to the above-described process at the time of loss.

  When the above procedure is executed, the main control CPU 72 ends the acquisition effect determination process after executing the determination result management process of step S82, and the first special symbol memory update process (FIG. 20) or the second special symbol of the caller. The process returns to the storage update process (FIG. 21). On the other hand, if it is determined in the previous step S54 that the loaded random number is not outside the range of the winning value but within the range (step S54: No), the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S56.

  Step S56: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the probability state schedule flag based on the previous determination result is set. The probability state schedule flag based on the previous determination result is set when there is a winning value among the jackpot determination random numbers stored so far, although the fluctuation has not yet started. Specifically, if there is a winning value in the jackpot determination random number stored so far, the jackpot symbol random number that is paired with this will be displayed in the “probable variable region passable symbol (9 round symbol 2, 16 round symbol)” If applicable, for example, “A0H” is set in the probability state schedule flag. This value represents a flag value for setting as a schedule that a high probability state is to be set in advance determination (prefetching determination) of the jackpot determined random number acquired after the jackpot determined random number. On the other hand, if there is a winning value in the jackpot decision random number stored so far, and the jackpot symbol random number paired with this corresponds to "non-probable (normal) symbol", the probability state For example, “01H” is set in the schedule flag. This value represents a flag value for setting as a schedule that a normal (low) probability state is set in advance determination (prefetching determination) of the big hit determination random number acquired after this big hit determination random number. If the winning value does not exist in the big hit determination random numbers stored so far, the flag value is reset (00H). Further, the value of the probability state schedule flag is stored in the flag area of the RAM 76, for example. Here, an example is given in which the advance hit determination is strictly performed using the “probability state schedule flag”. However, when the advance hit determination is simply performed based on the current probability state, step S56 and the subsequent steps are performed. Step S58, step S60, step S62, step S76, etc. may be omitted.

  If the probability state schedule flag has not yet been set (step S56: No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S66.

  Step S66: In this case, the main control CPU 72 sets the comparison value for the next low probability (normal time) in the A register. The low probability comparison value is also defined in advance according to the winning probability at the low probability in the pachinko machine 1.

  Step S68: Next, the main control CPU 72 loads the “current probability state flag”. This probability state flag indicates whether or not the current internal state has a high probability (probably changing), and is stored in the flag area of the RAM 76. If the current probability state is a high probability (probably changing), the value “01H” is set as the state flag, and if the current probability state is low (normally), the value of the state flag is reset (“00H”). ").

  Step S70: Then, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the loaded current special symbol probability state flag does not represent a high probability (≠ 01H), and if the result indicates a high probability (No Then, step S64 is executed.

  Step S64: The main control CPU 72 sets a comparative value for high probability. As a result, the low-probability comparison value set in the previous step S66 is rewritten. The high probability comparison value is defined in advance according to the winning probability at the high probability in the pachinko machine 1.

  As described above, when the probability state schedule flag based on the previous determination result is not yet set and the current internal state is high probability, the comparison value is rewritten for high probability and the next step S72 is performed. Will be executed. On the other hand, when it is confirmed in the previous step S70 that the current probability state flag does not represent a high probability (Yes), the main control CPU 72 skips step S64 and executes the next step S72.

  Step S72: The main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the random number loaded in the previous step S52 is out of the winning value range (lottery result destination determination means). That is, the main control CPU 72 subtracts the jackpot determination random number value from the comparison value set for each state. Similarly, the main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the calculation result is a negative value (<0) from the value of the flag register, and if the result is that the loaded random number is outside the range of the winning value (Yes) ), The main control CPU 72 executes the above-described variation pattern information preliminary determination process (step S80). On the other hand, if the loaded random number is not outside the range of the winning value but is within the range (No), the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S74.

  Step S74: The main control CPU 72 executes a jackpot symbol type determination process. This process is for determining the big hit type (winning type) at that time based on the big hit symbol random number paired with the big hit decision random number. For example, the main control CPU 72 loads the jackpot symbol random number for each symbol stored in the first special symbol memory update process (step S35 in FIG. 20) or the second special symbol memory update process (step S45 in FIG. 21). Then, the calculation using the comparison value is executed in the same manner as in the above step S54, and from the result, as the jackpot type, “probability variation region passage difficult symbol (9 round symbol 1)” or “probability variation region passage symbol (9 round symbol 2) , 16 round symbols) ”. The main control CPU 72 stores the determination result at this time as a special symbol destination determination value, and proceeds to the next step S76.

  Step S76: Then, the main control CPU 72 sets the value of the probability state schedule flag based on the previous determination result. Specifically, when the special symbol destination determination value stored in the previous step S74 represents “probability variation region passage difficult symbol”, the main control CPU 72 sets the value “01H” in the probability state schedule flag. On the other hand, when the special symbol destination determination value indicates “probable change region passable symbol”, the main control CPU 72 sets the value “A0H” in the probability state schedule flag. As a result, in the subsequent processing, it is determined that “flag set has been completed” in step S56.

  Step S78: The main control CPU 72 sets the special symbol destination determination value stored in the previous step S74 as the lower byte of the special symbol destination determination effect command. For example, “01H” is set as the special symbol destination determination value when it corresponds to “probability variation region difficult passage symbol”, and “A0H” is set when it corresponds to “probability variation region passage symbol”. In any case, by setting the lower byte data here, the standard lower byte data “00H” set in the previous step S50 is rewritten.

  Step S79: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a big hit hour variation pattern information prior determination process (variation pattern destination determination means). In this process, the main control CPU 72 generates the above-described variation pattern destination determination command for the variation time at the big hit. In the variation pattern destination determination command generated here, for example, prior determination information related to the reach variation time (or variation pattern number) at the time of big hit is reflected. Further, the variation pattern destination determination command generated here is set in the transmission buffer in the effect command output setting process (steps S39 and S49) as described above.

  The above is the procedure before the probability state schedule flag based on the previous determination result is set (before the internal first hit). On the other hand, when the probability state schedule flag is set through the previous step S76, the following procedure is executed. However, when the previous hit determination is performed only with the current probability state as described above, it is not necessary to execute the following step S56, step S58, step S60, step S62, and step S76.

  Step S56: When the main control CPU 72 confirms that a value has already been set in the probability state schedule flag (Yes), it next executes step S58.

  Step S58: The main control CPU 72 first sets a low probability (normal time) comparison value in the A register.

  Step S60: Next, the main control CPU 72 loads a “probability state schedule flag”. The probability state schedule flag is for setting a probability state in a subsequent determination based on the immediately preceding determination result as described above, and is stored in the flag area of the RAM 76. . If the probability state based on the immediately preceding destination determination result is scheduled to shift to a high probability (probability change), “A0H” is set as the value of the probability state schedule flag as described above. If the probability state based on is scheduled to return to a low probability (normal), “01H” is set as the value of the probability state schedule flag.

  Step S62: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the loaded probability state schedule flag does not represent a high-probability schedule (≠ 01H), and if the result indicates a high-probability schedule ( No) Next, step S64 is executed, and a comparative value for high probability is set.

  As described above, when the probability state schedule flag based on the previous determination result is already set and the value is a high probability, the next step S72 and subsequent steps after rewriting the comparison value for the high probability. Will be executed. On the other hand, when it is confirmed in the previous step S62 that the probability state schedule flag does not represent a schedule with a high probability but a schedule with a normal (low) probability (Yes), the main control CPU 72 performs a step. S64 is skipped and the subsequent step S72 and subsequent steps are executed. Thus, in the present embodiment, it is possible to make a prior jackpot determination in consideration of subsequent changes in internal state (normal probability state → high probability state, high probability state → normal probability state) based on the previous determination result. .

  When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the first special symbol memory update process (FIG. 20) or the second special symbol memory update process (FIG. 21).

[Special design game processing]
Next, the details of the special symbol game process executed in the interrupt management process (FIG. 10) will be described. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing a configuration example of the special symbol game process. The special symbol game process includes an execution selection process (step S1000), a special symbol change pre-process (step S2000), a special symbol change process (step S3000), a special symbol stop display process (step S4000), and a bonus game variable winning device. This is a configuration including a subroutine (program module) group of a management process (step S5000) and a small winning time variable winning device management process (step S6000). First, the basic flow of the special symbol game process will be described along each process.

  Step S1000: In the execution selection process, the main control CPU 72 selects the jump destination of the process to be executed next (any one of steps S2000 to S5000) from the “jump table”. For example, the main control CPU 72 sets the program address of the process to be executed next as the jump destination address, and sets the end of the special symbol game process as the return address in the stack pointer.

  Which process is selected as the next jump destination differs depending on the progress of the process performed so far (special symbol game management status). For example, if the special symbol has not yet started changing display (special symbol game management status: 00H), the main control CPU 72 selects the special symbol variation pre-processing (step S2000) as the next jump destination. On the other hand, if the special symbol variation pre-processing has already been completed (special symbol game management status: 01H), the main control CPU 72 selects the special symbol variation processing (step S3000) as the next jump destination, and the special symbol variation is in progress. If the process has been completed (special symbol game management status: 02H), the special symbol stop displaying process (step S4000) is selected as the next jump destination. In this embodiment, the jump destination address is specified by the “jump table” and the process is selected. However, apart from such a selection method, a “process flag”, a “process selection flag”, or the like is used. There is also a known programming example in which the CPU selects a process to be executed next. In such a programming example, the CPU CALLs each process in a single way, and at the top step, the conditional branch (continuation / return) is performed by referring to the flag one by one. However, in the selection method of this embodiment, the main control There is no need for the CPU 72 to call each process one by one.

  Step S2000: In the special symbol variation pre-processing, the main control CPU 72 performs an operation to prepare conditions for starting the variation display of the special symbol. The specific processing content will be described later using another flowchart.

  Step S3000: In the special symbol variation processing, the main control CPU 72 performs drive control of the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35 while counting the variation timer. Specifically, an ON or OFF drive signal (1 byte data) is output for each segment and dot (0th to 7th) of the 7-segment LED. The pattern of the drive signal changes with the passage of time, whereby a special symbol is displayed in a variable manner.

  Step S4000: In the special symbol stop display process, the main control CPU 72 controls the drive of the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35. Similarly, an ON or OFF drive signal is output for each segment and dot of the 7-segment LED. However, the pattern of the drive signal is constant, whereby a special symbol is stopped and displayed.

  Step S5000: The jackpot variable winning device management process is selected when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a big-hit manner in the previous special symbol stop display process. For example, when a special symbol is stopped and displayed in a manner of 9 round big hit or 16 round big hit, an opportunity to shift from the normal state until then to the big hit gaming state (special gaming state advantageous to the player) occurs. During the big hit game, the jump destination is set in the big win time variable winning device management process in the previous execution selection process (step S1000), and the special symbol variation display is not performed. In the big win time variable winning device management process, the first big winning port solenoid 90 is continuously operated for a certain period of time (for example, 29 seconds or 0.1 seconds or until ten game balls are counted). The first variable winning device 30 is opened and closed in a predetermined pattern (continuous operation of the special electric accessory). In addition, after the operation of the first variable prize winning device 30, the second large prize opening solenoid 97 is set in advance for a certain period of time (for example, until 29 seconds or 0.1 seconds or 10 game balls are counted). Thus, the second variable winning device 31 is opened and closed in a predetermined pattern (operation of the special electric accessory). Furthermore, when the 16 round big hit is true, after the operation of the second variable prize winning device 31, the first big prize opening solenoid 90 counts for a certain period of time (for example, 29 seconds or 10 game balls entered). The first variable winning device 30 is opened / closed in a predetermined pattern by being excited over a preset number of continuous operations (for example, 10 times) (operation of the special electric accessory). During this time, the game balls are intensively awarded to the first variable prize winning device 30 and the second variable prize winning device 31, thereby giving the player an opportunity to collect a lot of prize balls (special game). Execution means). The opening and closing operation of the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31 in the case of a big hit is called “round”, and if the total number of continuous operations is 16 times, these are called “16 rounds”. Sometimes referred to generically.

  In the present embodiment, as the first opening / closing operation pattern, the first variable winning device 30 is opened / closed from the first round to the sixth round, and the second variable winning device 31 is operated from the seventh round to the ninth round. An operation pattern in which the first variable prize-winning apparatus 30 is opened / closed from the 10th round to the 16th round can be employed. In the present embodiment, as the second opening / closing operation pattern, the first variable winning device 30 is opened / closed in the odd-numbered rounds (first round, third round, etc.), and the even-numbered rounds (second round, fourth round). Etc.), an operation pattern for opening and closing the second variable winning device 31 can be adopted. Furthermore, in this embodiment, not only 16 round big hits but also 9 round big hits are provided as the types of big hits, but for 16 round big hits and 9 round big hits, there are a plurality of winning types (winning symbols). ) May be provided.

  Further, when the main control CPU 72 sets a big winning opening opening pattern (number of rounds, number of opening / closing operations per round, opening time, etc.) in the big winning variable winning device management process, the first variable winning device 30 for one round is set. Alternatively, every time the opening / closing operation of the second variable winning device 31 is completed, the value of the round number counter is incremented by one. The value of the round number counter is stored in the count area of the RAM 76 with an initial value of 0, for example. Further, the main control CPU 72 generates a round number command representing the value of the round number counter. The round number command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process (step S212 in FIG. 10). When the value of the round number counter reaches the set number of continuous operations, the main control CPU 72 ends the big hit game (big player) only for that round.

  When the big hit game ends, the main control CPU 72 changes the state after the big hit game (high probability state, time reduction state) based on the game state flag (special symbol probability state flag, time reduction function operation flag) ( High probability time shortening state transition means, advantageous game state transition means). In the “high probability state”, the probability variation function is activated, and the winning probability in the internal lottery becomes, for example, about ten times higher than usual (specific game state transition means, high probability state transition means, high probability state setting means). Further, in the “time reduction state”, the time reduction function is activated, and the normal symbol operation lottery has a high probability as described above, and the variation time of the normal symbol is shortened and the opening time of the variable start winning device 28 is reduced. Is extended and the number of times of opening increases (so-called electric Chu support is performed). Note that the “high probability state” and the “time reduction state” may be transferred to only one of them in terms of control, or may be transferred in accordance with both of them.

  Step S6000: The small winning hour variable winning device management process is selected when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the small winning manner in the special symbol stop display process. For example, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a small hit state, an opportunity to shift from the normal state until then to the small hit gaming state occurs. During the small hit game, the jump destination is set in the small hit prize variable winning device management process in the previous execution selection process (step S1000), and the special symbol variation display is not performed. In the small hit game, the first variable winning device 30 opens and closes a predetermined number of times (for example, twice) for a predetermined opening time (for example, 0.1 seconds), but the first big prize opening is almost generated. do not do.

[Multiple winning types]
In the present embodiment, for the “16 round jackpot”, for example, only (1) “16 round jackpot” is provided as a plurality of winning types. In addition to “16 round symbol jackpot”, (2) “9 round jackpot 1” and (3) “9 round jackpot 2” are provided as a plurality of winning types. However, in this embodiment, jackpots other than 16 rounds and 9 rounds may be provided.

  The winning type corresponds to the type of the first special symbol or the second special symbol that is stopped and displayed at the time of winning. For example, “16 round jackpot” corresponds to the jackpot of “16 round symbol”, “9 round jackpot 1” corresponds to the jackpot of “9 round symbol 1”, “9 round jackpot 2” corresponds to “9 round jackpot 2” Corresponding to the jackpot. Therefore, hereinafter, the “winning type” will be appropriately referred to as “winning symbol”.

[Opening pattern of variable winning device]
FIG. 24 is a diagram illustrating an opening operation pattern of the variable winning device. The contents of the special winning opening corresponding to each winning symbol and the opening of the probability variation area will be described.

[9 round symbols 1]
In the above special symbol stop display process, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of “9 round symbols 1”, an opportunity to shift from the normal state to the big hit gaming state occurs (special game executing means). . In this case, the first big prize opening of the first variable prize winning device 30 is opened once for a sufficiently long time from the first round (for example, a maximum opening time of 29.0 seconds), which is 5 rounds. Continue to eyes. In the sixth round, the first grand prize opening is opened four times in a shorter time (for example, 0.1 second) than the first to fifth rounds. Therefore, the sixth round of the “9-round symbol 1” jackpot game is completed without giving the player a substantial ball (prize ball). In addition, in the seventh to ninth rounds, the second grand prize opening of the second variable winning device 31 is opened once each in a shorter time (for example, 0.1 second) than the first to fifth rounds. To do. Therefore, the seventh to ninth rounds of the jackpot game of “9 round symbol 1” are finished without giving a substantial play (prize ball) to the player. For this reason, in the “9 round symbol 1” jackpot game, approximately 5 rounds of winning balls (prize balls) are given to the player. If it falls under “9 round symbols 1”, even if the “time reduction function” is inactive in the previous game, by operating the “time reduction function” after the big hit game ends, A privilege to shift to the “shortened state” is given to the player. In addition, in the big hit game of “9 round symbol 1”, the second grand prize opening is opened from the seventh round to the ninth round, but the opening time of the second big prize opening is extremely short (for example, the start of the round) Therefore, the game ball does not pass through the probability variation area. Note that the first big prize opening of the first variable prize winning device 30 is closed without waiting for the longest opening time to elapse when a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times = 10 game balls) is won in one round. The Similarly, the second grand prize winning port of the second variable prize winning device 31 similarly does not wait for the longest opening time to elapse when a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times = 10 game balls) is won in one round. Closed.

[9 round symbols 2]
In the above special symbol stop display process, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of “9 round symbol 2”, an opportunity to shift from the normal state to the big hit gaming state occurs (special game executing means). . In this case, the first big prize opening of the first variable prize winning device 30 is opened once for a sufficiently long time from the first round (for example, a maximum opening time of 29.0 seconds), which is 5 rounds. Continue to eyes. In the sixth round, the first grand prize opening is opened four times in a shorter time (for example, 0.1 second) than the first to fifth rounds. Therefore, the sixth round of the “9-round symbol 2” jackpot game is completed without giving the player a substantial appearance (prize ball). Also, in the seventh round of the “9 round symbol 2” jackpot game, the second big prize opening of the second variable prize winning device 31 is opened for a sufficiently long time (for example, a maximum opening time of 29.0 seconds). Is performed once. Furthermore, in the 8th and 9th rounds, the second big prize opening of the second variable winning device 31 is opened once in a shorter time (for example, 0.1 second) than in the 7th round. For this reason, in the “9 round symbol 2” jackpot game, approximately 6 rounds of winning balls (prize balls) are given to the player. However, in the seventh round of the “9 round symbol 2” jackpot game, the opening time of the second grand prize opening is set to a long time (for example, 29 seconds from the start of the round), so that the game ball has a probability variation area. There is a possibility of passing. In the “9-round symbol 2” jackpot game, the second grand prize opening opens at the 8th and 9th rounds, but the opening time of the second grand prize opening is extremely short (for example, the start of the round) Therefore, the game ball does not pass through the probability variation area.

  In addition, when the game ball passes through the probability variation area arranged inside the second variable winning device 31 in the seventh round in the case of “9 round symbol 2”, the “probability” is reached after the end of the big hit game. The “variable function” is activated, and a privilege to shift to the “high probability state” is given to the player.

  Furthermore, if it falls under “9 round symbol 2”, regardless of whether or not the probability variation area has passed, even if the “time reduction function” is inactive in the previous game, By operating the “time reduction function”, a privilege to shift to the “time reduction state” is given to the player.

[16 round designs]
When the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the “16 round symbol” mode in the special symbol stop display processing described above, an opportunity to shift from the normal state until then to the big hit gaming state occurs (special game executing means). In this case, the first big prize opening of the first variable prize winning device 30 is opened once each over a sufficiently long time (for example, the opening time of 29.0 seconds at the longest) from the first round, which is 6 rounds. Continue to eyes. Then, the second big prize opening of the second variable prize winning device 31 is opened once each over a sufficiently long time (for example, an opening time of 29.0 seconds at the longest) from the seventh round, and this is the ninth round. Continue until. Thereafter, the first grand prize winning opening of the first variable prize winning device 30 is opened once each over a sufficiently long time (for example, an opening time of 29.0 seconds at the longest) from the 10th round, and this is the 16th round. Continue until. For this reason, in the “16 round symbol” jackpot game, approximately 16 rounds of winning balls (prize balls) are given to the player. Here, in the 7th to 9th rounds of the “16 round symbol” jackpot game, the opening time of the second big prize opening is set to a long time (for example, 29 seconds from the start of the round). May pass through the probability variation region.

  In addition, if the game ball passes through the probability variation area arranged inside the second variable winning device 31 between the 7th and 9th rounds in the case of “16 round symbols”, the big hit game After the end of, the “probability changing function” is activated, and a privilege to shift to the “high probability state” is given to the player.

  Furthermore, if the “16 round symbol” is applicable, even if the “time reduction function” is inactive in the previous game regardless of whether or not the probability variation area has passed, By operating the “time reduction function”, a privilege to shift to the “time reduction state” is given to the player.

  In any case, if the winning symbol falls under any of the above “9-round symbol 2” or “16-round symbol” and the game ball passes through the probability changing area during the big hit game, the internal state is reached after the big hit game ends. The player is given a privilege of shifting to the “high probability time reduction state”. In addition, in the “high probability time reduction state”, an internal lottery is won, the winning symbol at that time corresponds to either “9 round symbol 2” or “16 round symbol”, and the game ball is played during the big hit game If the probability variation area is passed, the “high probability time shortened state” is continued (restarted) even after the big hit game ends. On the other hand, if the winning symbol corresponds to the above “9 round symbol 1”, the game ball does not pass through the probability variation area during the big hit game, so the internal state shifts to the “low probability time shortened state” after the big hit game ends. To do. Even if the winning symbol corresponds to either “9 round symbol 2” or “16 round symbol” above, if the game ball does not pass through the probability variation area during the big hit game, the internal state will be Transition to “low probability time state”.

  In the operation pattern shown in this table, the interval time between rounds is a common “1.5 seconds”. The interval time between rounds is a waiting time set between rounds.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the operation patterns of the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31 are variable winning device operation pattern tables (variable winning devices) for each unit game of each of the plurality of winning types. Device operation pattern defining means). Then, the main control CPU 72 determines the operation patterns of the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31 while referring to the variable winning device operation pattern table.

[Small hits]
Further, in the present embodiment, small wins are provided as winning types other than non-winning. When winning a small hit, a small hit game is performed separately from the big hit game, and the first variable winning device 30 is opened and closed (special game execution means). That is, when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a small hit state in the special symbol stop display process, the small hit game (the first variable winning device 30 is activated in the normal probability state or the high probability state). Game) to be executed. In such a small hit game, although the first variable winning device 30 opens and closes a predetermined number of times (for example, twice), there is hardly any winning in the first big winning opening. In addition, even if the small hit game ends, the “probability variation function” does not operate, and the “time reduction function” does not operate, so the “probability state” or “time reduction state” The privilege to be transferred is not granted (it is not a prerequisite for that). Also, even if you win a small hit in the “high probability state”, the “high probability state” will not end after the small hit game ends. The “time reduction state” does not end after the winning game ends (except when the upper limit is reached). In the present embodiment, the game specification for setting a small hit is used, but it may be a game specification for not setting a small hit.

[Special symbol change pre-treatment]
FIG. 25 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of the special symbol variation pre-processing. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along each procedure.

  Step S2100: First, the main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the first special symbol working memory number or the second special symbol working memory number remains (greater than 0). This confirmation can be made with reference to the value of the working memory number counter stored in the RAM 76. When the number of working memories of both the first special symbol and the second special symbol is 0 (No), the main control CPU 72 executes a demonstration setting process in step S2500.

  Step S2500: In this process, the main control CPU 72 generates a demonstration effect command. The demonstration effect command is output to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process (step S212 in FIG. 10). When the demo setting process is executed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game process. At the time of return, it returns to the end address as described above (and so on).

  On the other hand, if the value of the working memory number counter of either the first special symbol or the second special symbol is greater than 0 (Yes), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S2200.

  Step S2200: The main control CPU 72 executes a special symbol storage area shift process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 preferentially reads out the lottery random numbers (big hit determination random number, big hit symbol random number) stored in the random number storage area of the RAM 76, which corresponds to the second special symbol. At this time, if random numbers are stored in two or more sections, the main control CPU 72 reads and erases (consumes) the random numbers in order from the first section, and then moves (shifts) the remaining random numbers one by one to the previous section. ) The read random number is stored, for example, in another temporary storage area. When the random number corresponding to the second special symbol is not stored, the main control CPU 72 reads the random number corresponding to the first special symbol and stores it in the temporary storage area. Each random number stored in the temporary storage area is used for internal lottery in the next jackpot determination process. As a result, in the present embodiment, the variable display of the second special symbol is preferentially performed over the first special symbol. In addition, the program which reads a random number in the order memorize | stored simply may be sufficient, without providing the priority order according to such special symbols. Further, in this processing, the main control CPU 72 subtracts one value from the working memory number counter (the one of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, which has been subjected to the random number shift) stored in the RAM 76, and subtracts it. The later value is set to “Number of working memories at start of change”. Thereby, the display mode of the number stored by the first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a or the second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a changes (decreases by 1) in the display output management process (step S210 in FIG. 10). . When the procedure so far is finished, the main control CPU 72 then executes step S2300.

  Step S2300: The main control CPU 72 executes a big hit determination process (internal lottery). In this process, the main control CPU 72 first sets a range of the big hit value and determines whether or not the read random number value is included in this range (lottery execution means). The range of the jackpot value set at this time is different between the normal probability state and the high probability state (when the probability variation function is activated). In the high probability state, the range of the jackpot value is expanded to about 10 times that of the normal probability state. The If the random value read at this time is included in the range of the big hit value, the main control CPU 72 sets the big hit flag (01H), and then proceeds to step S2400.

  When the above big hit flag is not set, the main control CPU 72 sets the range of the small hit value next in the same big hit determination process, and determines whether or not the read random number value is included in this range (lottery execution). means). The “small hit” here is other than non-winning (out of), but is different from “big hit”. In other words, “big hit” generates an opportunity (game milestone) to shift to the above “high probability state” or “time reduction state”, but “small hit” does not generate such an opportunity. However, “small hit” is positioned as satisfying the condition for operating the first variable winning device 30 as in “big hit”. The range of the small hit value set at this time may be different between the normal probability state and the high probability state (when the probability variation function is activated), or may be the same. In any case, if the read random number value is included in the range of the small hit value, the main control CPU 72 sets the small hit flag, and then proceeds to step S2400. As described above, in the present embodiment, as the hit range corresponding to other than the non-winning, the range of the big hit value and the small hit value is defined in advance in the program. Each of them may be written in the ROM 74, read out, and the big hit determination may be performed while comparing with the random value.

  Step S2400: The main control CPU 72 determines whether or not a value (01H) is set for the big hit flag in the previous big hit determination process. If the value (01H) is not set in the jackpot flag (No), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S2402.

  Step S2402: The main control CPU 72 determines whether or not a value (01H) is set in the small hit flag in the previous big hit determination process. If the value (01H) is not set in the small hit flag (No), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S2404. The main control CPU 72 may determine the big hit (for example, 01H is set) or the small hit (for example, 0AH is set) according to the value of the common hit flag without separately preparing the big hit flag and the small hit flag.

  Step S2404: The main control CPU 72 executes an off-time stop symbol determination process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets stop symbol number data at the time of disconnection by the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35. Further, the main control CPU 72 generates a stop symbol command and a lottery result command (at the time of losing) to be transmitted to the effect control device 124. These commands are transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process (step S212 in FIG. 10).

  In this embodiment, since the 7-segment LED is used for the first special symbol display device 34 and the second special symbol display device 35, for example, the display mode of the stop symbol at the time of disconnection is always set to one segment (the center It is possible to fix the stop symbol number data to one value (for example, 64H) by keeping only the lighting display of the bar "-"). In this case, the storage capacity used in the program can be reduced, the processing load on the main control CPU 72 can be reduced, and the processing speed can be improved.

  Step S2405: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a deviation variation pattern determination process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the fluctuation pattern number at the time of deviation for the special symbol (fluctuation pattern selection means). The variation pattern number is used to distinguish the variation display type (pattern) of the special symbol or to correspond to the variation time required for the variation display. Since the fluctuation time at the time of loss differs depending on whether or not it is the above “time reduction state”, in this process, the main control CPU 72 loads the gaming state flag and the current state is “time reduction state”. Check if it exists. In the “time reduction state”, except for the case where reach fluctuation is basically performed, the fluctuation time at the time of disconnection is set to a shortened time (for example, about 2.0 seconds) (shortening fluctuation time determination means) ). In addition, even if not in the “time shortening state”, the fluctuation time at the time of losing is based on, for example, “the number of operating memories at the start of fluctuation display (0 to 3)” set in step S2200, except when the reach fluctuation occurs (For example, the number of working memories at the start of variable display 0 to about 12.5 seconds, the number of operating memories at the start of variable display 1 to about 8 seconds, the number of operating memories at the start of variable display 2 to 5 → About 3 seconds, the number of working memories at the start of variable display is 3 → 2.5 seconds). Note that the symbol stop display time at the time of disconnection is constant (for example, about 0.5 seconds) regardless of the variation pattern. The main control CPU 72 sets the value of the determined fluctuation time (at the time of disconnection) in the fluctuation timer, and sets the value of the stop display time at the time of disconnection in the stop symbol display timer.

  In the present embodiment, when the result of the internal lottery is a non-winning result, for example, a “reach effect” is generated and the control is performed so that the “reach effect” is not generated. It is said. The “variation pattern selection table at the time of loss” preliminarily defines variation patterns corresponding to a plurality of types of effects such as “non-reach effect” and “reach effect”. One of the fluctuation patterns is selected from the inside. The reach production includes various reach production such as normal reach production, long reach production, super reach production, and the like.

[Example of variation pattern selection table for loss]
FIG. 26 is a diagram illustrating an example of a variation pattern selection table at the time of loss (low probability non-time shortened state).
This selection table is a table that is used at the time of losing in the low probability non-time shortened state (in the case of non-winning) (variation pattern defining means). In addition, this selection table has a structure in which, for example, “comparison value” and “variation pattern number” are stored as a set of 1 byte each in order from the head address. The “comparison value” includes, for example, eight different values “101”, “201”, “211”, “221”, “231”, “241”, “251”, “255 (FFH)”. “1” to “8” of “variation pattern number” are assigned to each “comparison value”.

  Fluctuation pattern numbers “1” to “5” correspond to fluctuation patterns that are out of reach without performing a reach effect, and fluctuation pattern numbers “6” to “8” are fluctuation patterns that are out of reach after reaching. It corresponds. The variation pattern selection table may have different table contents depending on the number of operation memories at the start of variation (the same applies hereinafter).

  Here, the length of the set fluctuation time is greatly different between the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern. That is, the “non-reach variation pattern” basically corresponds to a short variation time (for example, about 3.0 seconds to 12.0 seconds depending on the number of working memories), whereas the “reach variation pattern” This corresponds to a long fluctuation time (for example, about 30 seconds to 150 seconds) more than twice as long.

  Then, the main control CPU 72 sequentially compares the obtained variation pattern determination random value with the “comparison value” in the variation pattern selection table, and if the random value is equal to or less than the comparison value, The corresponding variation pattern number is selected (variation pattern determining means). For example, if the variation pattern determination random value at that time is “190”, the main control CPU 72 determines that the random value exceeds the comparison value when compared with the first comparison value “101”. 201 "is compared with the random value. In this case, since the random value is equal to or smaller than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 selects “2” as the corresponding variation pattern number.

FIG. 27 is a diagram illustrating an example of the variation pattern selection table at the time of loss (low probability time reduction state).
This selection table is a table that is used at the time of losing in the low probability time shortened state (when it corresponds to non-winning) (fluctuation pattern defining means). In addition, this selection table has a structure in which, for example, “comparison value” and “variation pattern number” are stored as a set of 1 byte each in order from the head address. The “comparison value” includes, for example, eight different values “101”, “201”, “211”, “221”, “231”, “241”, “251”, “255 (FFH)”. “21” to “28” of “variation pattern number” are assigned to each “comparison value”.

  Variation pattern numbers “21” to “25” correspond to variation patterns that are out of reach without performing a reach effect, and variation pattern numbers “26” to “28” are variation patterns that are out of reach after reaching. It corresponds. However, since the variation pattern numbers “21” to “25” are non-reach variations due to time shortening variations, a shortened variation time (for example, about 2.0 seconds) is set as the variation time in the normal state. .

  The main control CPU 72 sequentially compares the obtained variation pattern determination random value with the “comparison value” in the variation pattern selection table, and if the random value is equal to or less than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 corresponds to the comparison value. A variation pattern number is selected (variation pattern determination means). For example, if the variation pattern determination random value at that time is “190”, the main control CPU 72 determines that the random value exceeds the comparison value when compared with the first comparison value “101”. 201 "is compared with the random value. In this case, since the random value is equal to or smaller than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 selects “22” as the corresponding variation pattern number.

FIG. 28 is a diagram showing an example of a variation pattern selection table at the time of loss (high probability time reduction state).
This selection table is a table that is used at the time of losing in the high probability time shortened state (when it corresponds to non-winning) (fluctuation pattern defining means). In addition, this selection table has a structure in which, for example, “comparison value” and “variation pattern number” are stored as a set of 1 byte each in order from the head address. The “comparison value” includes, for example, eight different values “101”, “201”, “211”, “221”, “231”, “241”, “251”, “255 (FFH)”. “41” to “48” of “variation pattern number” are assigned to each “comparison value”.

  The variation pattern numbers “41” to “45” correspond to variation patterns that are out of reach without performing the reach effect, and the variation pattern numbers “46” to “48” are variation patterns that are out of reach after reaching. It corresponds. However, the fluctuation pattern numbers “41” to “45” are fluctuation times that are extremely shortened as the fluctuation time in the normal state (for example, about 0.5 seconds) in order to realize high-speed fluctuation in the high probability time reduction state. Is set.

  The main control CPU 72 sequentially compares the obtained variation pattern determination random value with the “comparison value” in the variation pattern selection table, and if the random value is equal to or less than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 corresponds to the comparison value. A variation pattern number is selected (variation pattern determination means). For example, if the variation pattern determination random value at that time is “190”, the main control CPU 72 determines that the random value exceeds the comparison value when compared with the first comparison value “101”. 201 "is compared with the random value. In this case, since the random value is equal to or smaller than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 selects “42” as the corresponding variation pattern number.

[Refer to Fig. 25: Special symbol change pre-processing]
The above steps S2404 and S2405 are control procedures when the big hit determination result is out of place (in the case other than non-winning), but the determination result is a big hit (step S2400: Yes) or a small hit (step S2402: Yes). The main control CPU 72 executes the following procedure. First, the case of jackpot will be described.

  Step S2410: The main control CPU 72 executes a big hit stop symbol determination process (winning type determination means). In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the type of the winning symbol (stop symbol number at the time of jackpot) for each special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) based on the jackpot symbol random number. The relationship between the jackpot symbol random number value and the type of winning symbol is defined in advance in the special symbol determination data table (winning type defining means). For this reason, the main control CPU 72 can determine the type of winning symbol based on the big hit symbol random number from the stored contents by referring to the big hit symbol stop selection table in the big hit symbol stop determination process.

[Winning pattern at the time of big hit]
In the present embodiment, there are roughly three types of winning symbols that are selectively determined at the time of a big hit. The three types are “9-round symbol 1”, “9-round symbol 2”, and “16-round symbol”. Each of the three types of winning symbols may further include a plurality of winning symbols. For example, in the case of “9 round symbol 1”, “9 round symbol 1a”, “9 round symbol 1b”, “9 round symbol 1c”, and so on.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, the selection ratio of the winning symbol selected at the time of the big winning of the internal lottery corresponding to the first special symbol and the second special symbol is different. For this reason, the main control CPU 72 distinguishes the winning symbol to be selected depending on whether the result of the big hit this time corresponds to the first special symbol or the second special symbol.

[First Special Symbol Big Stop Stop Symbol Selection Table]
FIG. 29 is a diagram showing a configuration example of a first special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table. When the result of the big hit this time corresponds to the first special symbol, the main control CPU 72 refers to the first special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table (winning type defining means) to determine the type of the winning symbol.

  In the first special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table, the left column shows the distribution value by winning symbol, and each allocation value “50”, “45”, “5” is set to 100. Corresponds to the ratio of cases. In the second column from the left, “9 round symbol 1”, “9 round symbol 2”, and “16 round symbol” corresponding to each distribution value are shown. That is, at the time of the big hit corresponding to the first special symbol, the ratio of selecting “9 round symbol 1” is 50/100 (= 50%), and the ratio of selecting “9 round symbol 2” is 100 minutes. The ratio of “16 round symbols” is 5/100 (= 5%). The size of each distribution value corresponds to the selection ratio for each winning symbol using a jackpot symbol random number.

  In any case, if the current jackpot result corresponds to the first special symbol, the main control CPU 72 performs a selection lottery based on the jackpot symbol random number, and the selection ratio shown in the first special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table To select the winning symbol selectively. Further, in the first special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table, for example, 2-byte command data is defined as a stop symbol command at the time of winning as shown in the third column from the left. The stop symbol command is described by, for example, a combination of MODE value-EVENT value, and among these, the MODE value “B1H” of the upper byte is selected when the winning symbol of this time is the big hit of the first special symbol. Represents. Further, the EVENT values “01H”, “02H”, and “03H” in the lower byte represent the types of winning symbols corresponding to each other in the selection table. Therefore, for example, if the result of the big hit this time corresponds to the first special symbol, and “9 round symbol 1” is selected as the winning symbol, the stop symbol command at the time of winning is described as “B1H01H” It will be.

  As described above, when the selected symbol is selected from the first special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table, the main control CPU 72 generates a stop symbol command at that time. The generated stop symbol command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process described above, for example. Further, the main control CPU 72 determines a big hit stop symbol number for the first special symbol based on the selected winning symbol.

[Time reduction]
In the right column of the first special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table, the value of the number of time reductions (limit number) given after the end of the big hit game is shown.
In the present embodiment, when it corresponds to “9 round symbol 1”, “9 round symbol 2” or “16 round symbol”, the number of time reductions is given 100 times. However, if the game ball corresponds to “9 round symbol 2” or “16 round symbol” and the game ball passes through the probability variation area during the big hit game, the number of time reductions is given 170 times.

[2nd special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table]
FIG. 30 is a diagram showing a configuration example of a second special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table. The main control CPU 72 determines the type of winning symbol with reference to the second special symbol big-hit stop symbol selection table (winning type defining means) when the result of the big jackpot corresponds to the second special symbol.

  Also in the second special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table, the left column shows the distribution value by winning symbol, and each of the distribution values “20” and “80” is the case where the denominator is 100. It corresponds to the ratio. Similarly, in the second column from the left, “9 round symbol 1”, “9 round symbol 2”, and “16 round symbol” corresponding to the distribution value are shown. That is, at the big hit corresponding to the second special symbol, the ratio of selecting “9 round symbol 2” is 20/100 (= 20%), and the rate of selecting “16 round symbol” is 100. 80 minutes (= 80%). In the second special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table, a distribution value for “9 round symbol 1” is not set.

  When the result of this big hit corresponds to the second special symbol, the main control CPU 72 performs a selection lottery based on the big hit symbol random number, and selects the winning symbol with the selection ratio shown in the second special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table To decide. Similarly, in the second special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table, for example, 2-byte command data is defined as the stop symbol command at the time of winning as shown in the third column from the left. Again, the stop symbol command is described by the combination of the above MODE value-EVENT value. Among these, the MODE value “B2H” of the upper byte is the one selected when the winning symbol of the second special symbol is the current winning symbol. It represents that. Further, the EVENT values “02H” and “03H” in the lower byte represent the types of winning symbols corresponding to each other in the selection table. Therefore, for example, if the result of the big hit this time corresponds to the second special symbol, and “16 round symbol” is selected as the winning symbol, the stop symbol command is described as “B2H03H”.

  As described above, when the selected symbol is selected from the second special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table, the main control CPU 72 generates a stop symbol command at that time. The generated stop symbol command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process described above, for example. Further, the main control CPU 72 determines a big hit stop symbol number for the second special symbol based on the selected winning symbol.

[Time reduction]
In the right column of the second special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table, the value of the number of time reductions (limit number) given after the end of the big hit game is shown.
In this embodiment, when it corresponds to “9 round symbol 2” or “16 round symbol”, the number of time reductions is given 100 times. However, if the game ball corresponds to “9 round symbol 2” or “16 round symbol” and the game ball passes through the probability variation area during the big hit game, the number of time reductions is given 170 times.

  Note that the selection ratio of the winning symbol differs between the first special symbol and the second special symbol as described above, for example, for the following reason. That is, when shifting to the “high probability time shortening state” or the “low probability time shortening state”, the variable start winning device 28 operates at a higher frequency compared to the normal time (when the time shortening function is not activated). The operation memory for the second special symbol is more easily accumulated than the operation memory for the first special symbol. In this case, if the selection ratio of “16 round symbols” is increased for the second special symbol, it will be easier to win the “16 round symbols” than usual, so that it is possible to increase the player's profit accordingly. There is.

[Refer to Fig. 25: Special symbol change pre-processing]
Step S2412: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a big hit hour variation pattern determination process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the variation pattern (variation time and stop display time) of the first special symbol or the second special symbol based on the variation pattern determination random number shifted in the previous step S2200. The main control CPU 72 sets the value of the determined variation time in the variation timer, and sets the value of the stop display time in the stop symbol display timer. In general, in the case of big hit reach fluctuation, a fluctuation time longer than that at the time of loss is determined.

  In the present embodiment, when the result of the internal lottery corresponds to a big hit of 9 rounds or a big hit of 16 rounds, for example, a “reach effect” is generated to produce a big hit. In the “big hit variation pattern selection table”, variation patterns corresponding to a plurality of types of “reach effects” are defined, and in the case of 9 round big hit or 16 round big hit, any one of them is selected. A variation pattern will be selected. The reach production includes various reach production such as normal reach production, long reach production, super reach production, and the like. Also, when winning with the time shortening function activated, a variation pattern with a short variation time (a variation pattern without a reach effect) may be selected without selecting a variation pattern with a long variation time. Good.

[Example of big hit fluctuation pattern selection table]
FIG. 31 is a diagram showing an example of the big hit hour variation pattern selection table (low probability non-time reduced state).
This selection table is a table used at the time of winning in the low probability non-time shortened state (fluctuation pattern defining means). In this embodiment, variation patterns are not distinguished for each type of jackpot (for example, corresponding to five round big hits, 10 round big hits, and 16 round big hits), but a dedicated variation pattern selection table is used for each big hit. May be used (the same applies hereinafter). In addition, this selection table has a structure in which, for example, “comparison value” and “variation pattern number” are stored as a set of 1 byte each in order from the head address. The “comparison value” includes, for example, eight different values “101”, “201”, “211”, “221”, “231”, “241”, “251”, “255 (FFH)”. “61” to “68” of “variation pattern number” are assigned to each “comparison value”.

  The variation pattern numbers “61” to “68” all correspond to the variation pattern that is a hit when the reach effect is performed.

  The main control CPU 72 sequentially compares the obtained variation pattern determination random value with the “comparison value” in the variation pattern selection table, and if the random value is equal to or less than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 corresponds to the comparison value. A variation pattern number is selected (variation pattern determination means). For example, if the variation pattern determination random value at that time is “190”, the main control CPU 72 determines that the random value exceeds the comparison value when compared with the first comparison value “101”. 201 "is compared with the random value. In this case, since the random value is equal to or smaller than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 selects “62” as the corresponding variation pattern number.

FIG. 32 is a diagram illustrating an example of the big hit hour variation pattern selection table (low probability time reduction state).
This selection table is a table used at the time of winning in the low probability time shortened state (fluctuation pattern defining means). In addition, this selection table has a structure in which, for example, “comparison value” and “variation pattern number” are stored as a set of 1 byte each in order from the head address. The “comparison value” includes, for example, eight different values “101”, “201”, “211”, “221”, “231”, “241”, “251”, “255 (FFH)”. “81” to “88” of “variation pattern number” are assigned to each “comparison value”.

  The variation pattern numbers “81” to “88” all correspond to the variation pattern that is a hit when the reach effect is performed.

  The main control CPU 72 sequentially compares the obtained variation pattern determination random value with the “comparison value” in the variation pattern selection table, and if the random value is equal to or less than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 corresponds to the comparison value. A variation pattern number is selected (variation pattern determination means). For example, if the variation pattern determination random value at that time is “190”, the main control CPU 72 determines that the random value exceeds the comparison value when compared with the first comparison value “101”. 201 "is compared with the random value. In this case, since the random value is equal to or smaller than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 selects “82” as the corresponding variation pattern number.

FIG. 33 is a diagram showing an example of the big hit hour variation pattern selection table (high probability time reduction state).
This selection table is a table used at the time of winning in the high probability time shortened state (fluctuation pattern defining means). In addition, this selection table has a structure in which, for example, “comparison value” and “variation pattern number” are stored as a set of 1 byte each in order from the head address. The “comparison value” includes, for example, eight different values “101”, “201”, “211”, “221”, “231”, “241”, “251”, “255 (FFH)”. The “variation pattern number” “101” to “108” is assigned to each “comparison value”.

  The variation pattern numbers “101” to “108” all correspond to the variation pattern that is a hit when the reach effect is performed. Note that when winning in the high probability time shortening state, a variation pattern that is a hit may be set without a reach effect.

  The main control CPU 72 sequentially compares the obtained variation pattern determination random value with the “comparison value” in the variation pattern selection table, and if the random value is equal to or less than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 corresponds to the comparison value. A variation pattern number is selected (variation pattern determination means). For example, if the variation pattern determination random value at that time is “190”, the main control CPU 72 determines that the random value exceeds the comparison value when compared with the first comparison value “101”. 201 "is compared with the random value. In this case, since the random value is equal to or smaller than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 selects “102” as the corresponding variation pattern number.

[Refer to Fig. 25: Special symbol change pre-processing]
Step S2414: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a big hit other setting process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 selects any one of “9 round symbol 1”, “9 round symbol 2”, and “16 round symbol” as the winning symbol type (hit stop symbol number) determined in the previous step S2410. In this case, the main control CPU 72 sets the value (01H) of the time shortening function operation flag as a game state flag in the flag area of the RAM 76 (time shortening state transition means, time shortening function operation means, advantageous game state transition means).

  In the process of step S2414, the main control CPU 72 determines the display mode of the stop symbol (big hit symbol) by the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35 based on the big hit time stop symbol number. At the same time, the main control CPU 72 generates a lottery result command (at the time of the big hit) together with the stop symbol command (at the time of the big hit). The stop symbol command and the lottery result command are also transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process.

Next, processing for small hits will be described.
Step S2407: The main control CPU 72 executes a small hit stop symbol determination process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the type of winning symbol at the time of small hit (stop symbol number at small hit) based on the big hit symbol random number. Similarly, the relationship between the big winning symbol random number value and the type of winning symbol at the time of small hitting is preliminarily defined in the special symbol selection table at small hitting (winning type defining means). In this embodiment, in order to reduce the load on the main control CPU 72, the winning symbol at the time of the small hit is determined using the big hit symbol random number, but a dedicated random number may be used separately.

[Winning pattern for small hits]
In the present embodiment, the winning symbol at the time of small hit is only one type of “one-time small hit symbol”. However, other types such as “twice open small hit symbol” and “three open small hit symbol” may be prepared. As described above, “small hit” as a result of the internal lottery is not an opportunity for the subsequent state to change to “high probability state” or “time reduction state”, and thus is essential for this type of pachinko machine. A “one-time small hit symbol” can be provided without being bound by the definition of “two rounds (two times open) or more”.

  Step S2408: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a small hit hour variation pattern determination process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the variation pattern (variation time and stop display time) of the first special symbol or the second special symbol based on the variation pattern determination random number shifted in the previous step S2200 (variation pattern selection means). ). Further, the main control CPU 72 sets the determined variation time value in the variation timer, and sets the stop display time value in the stop symbol display timer. In the present embodiment, the reach variation pattern can be selected in the case of a small hit, or a variation pattern equivalent to that in the normal variation can be selected.

  Step S2409: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a small hitting and other setting process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the display mode of the stop symbol (small hit symbol) by the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35 based on the stop symbol number at the time of small hit. In addition, the main control CPU 72 generates a stop symbol command and a lottery result command (at the time of a small hit) to be transmitted to the effect control device 124. The stop symbol command and the lottery result command are also transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process.

  Step S2415: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes special symbol variation start processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 selects the fluctuation pattern data based on the fluctuation pattern number (out of time / hit). At the same time, the main control CPU 72 sets a special symbol variation start flag in the flag area of the RAM 76. Then, the main control CPU 72 generates a change start command to be transmitted to the effect control device 124. This variation start command is also transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process. When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 sets the special symbol changing process (step S3000) as the next jump destination and returns to the special symbol game process.

[FIG. 23: Special symbol change processing, special symbol stop display processing]
In the special symbol fluctuation processing, the main control CPU 72 loads the value of the fluctuation timer from the register to the timer counter as described above, and then the timer according to the passage of time (clock pulse count number or interrupt counter value). Decrement the counter value. Then, while referring to the value of the timer counter, the main control CPU 72 controls the special symbol variation display as described above until the value becomes zero. When the value of the timer counter becomes 0, the main control CPU 72 sets the special symbol stop display in-progress process (step S4000) as the next jump destination.

  In the special symbol stop display process, the main control CPU 72 controls the special symbol stop display based on the stop symbol determined in the stop symbol determination process (steps S2404, S2407, and S2410 in FIG. 25). The main control CPU 72 generates a symbol stop command to be transmitted to the effect control device 124. The symbol stop command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process. When the stop symbol is displayed for a predetermined time in the special symbol stop display process, the main control CPU 72 deletes the symbol changing flag.

[Special symbol memory area shift processing]
FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the special symbol storage area shift process. When the value of the operation memory counter corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol is larger than “0” in the previous special symbol variation pre-processing (step S2100: Yes in FIG. 25), the main control CPU 72 Executes this special symbol storage area shift process. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along each procedure.

  Step S2210: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the oldest one of the existing working memories corresponds to the first special symbol. That is, when the storage area of the RAM 76 is accessed and the oldest working memory among them does not correspond to the first special symbol but corresponds to the second special symbol (No), the main control CPU 72 The process proceeds to step S2212.

  Step S2212: The main control CPU 72 designates the second special symbol as a special symbol for shifting the storage area. This designation is performed, for example, by setting “02H” as the target symbol designation value.

  Step S2214: On the other hand, if the oldest working memory corresponds to the first special symbol (Step S2210: Yes), the main control CPU 72 designates the first special symbol as the special symbol to be shifted in the storage area. . The designation in this case is performed, for example, by setting “01H” as the target symbol designation value.

  Step S2216: The main control CPU 72 shifts the random number storage area of the RAM 76 for the target special symbol designated in either step S2212 or step S2214. The details of the specific processing are as already described in the previous special symbol change pre-processing.

  Step S2218: Next, the main control CPU 72 subtracts the value of the operation memory counter for the target special symbol. For example, if the target to shift the current storage area is the second special symbol, the main control CPU 72 subtracts (-1) the value of the working memory counter corresponding to the second special symbol.

  Step S2220: Then, the main control CPU 72 sets “the number of operation memories at the start of fluctuation” from the value of the operation memory counter after the subtraction. Here, for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the value of the operation memory counter may be added and the “number of operation memories at the start of change” may be set.

Step S2222: Further, the main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the special symbol to be shifted in the current storage area is the second special symbol.
Step S2224: When the target is the second special symbol (step S2222: Yes), the main control CPU 72 sets the working command when the number of working memories is reduced for the second special symbol. The effect command set here is also generated as a one-word-length command, but its structure is in contrast to the above-described “effect command when increasing the number of working memories”. That is, the production command at the time when the number of working memories decreases is lower than the value of lower bytes (for example, “00H” to “03H” that represents the number of working memories after reduction with respect to the preceding value (for example, “BCH”) of the upper bytes representing the command type. )) And an additional value (for example, “10H”) meaning “decrease in the number of working memories accompanying consumption” is further added (logical sum) to the lower byte value. Therefore, for the lower byte, the second value becomes “1” by ORing the added value “10H”, and this value represents “the result (change information) due to the decrease in the number of working memories”. It will be a thing. In other words, if the lower byte of the command is “13H”, it means that the number of working memories up to the previous time “4” (command notation is “14H”) is reduced by one, so that the current working memory number is “3” (command The notation is “13H”). Similarly, if the lower byte is “12H” to “10H”, it means that the number of working memories “3” to “1” up to the previous time (command notation is “13H” to “11H”) is decreased by one respectively. This indicates that the current operation memory number is “2” to “0” (command notation is “12H” to “10H”). The preceding value “BCH” is a value indicating that the current effect command is the working memory number command for the second special symbol.

  Step S2226: If the current target is the first special symbol (Step S2222: No), the main control CPU 72 sets an effect command for reducing the number of working memories regarding the first special symbol. The command in this case is the same as the above except that the preceding value is a value (for example, “BBH”) indicating that the previous value is the working memory number command for the first special symbol.

Step S2228: Then, the main control CPU 72 executes an effect command output process. This process is for transmitting the production command for reducing the number of working memories set in the previous step S2224 or step S2226 to the production control device 124 (memory number notification means).
When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol variation pre-processing (FIG. 25).

[Special symbol stop display processing]
Next, FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the special symbol stop display process. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along each procedure.

  Step S4100: The main control CPU 72 subtracts the value of the stop symbol display timer (decrements by the interrupt period).

  Step S4200: The main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the stop display time has ended based on the value of the stop symbol display timer subtracted this time. Specifically, if the value of the stop symbol display timer is not 0 or less, the main control CPU 72 determines that the stop display time has not yet ended (No). In this case, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game process, jumps from the execution selection process (step S1000 in FIG. 23) in the next interrupt cycle, and repeatedly executes the special symbol stop display process.

  On the other hand, if the value of the stop symbol display timer is 0 or less, the main control CPU 72 determines that the stop display time has ended (Yes). In this case, the main control CPU 72 next executes step S4250.

  Step S4250: The main control CPU 72 generates a symbol stop command and a stop display time end command. The symbol stop command and the stop display time end command are transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process. In addition, the main control CPU 72 erases the symbol changing flag here. The “stop display time end command” is a command indicating that the stop display time of the special symbol has ended (elapsed).

  Step S4300: Here, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value of the big hit flag (01H) is set. When the value of the big hit flag (01H) is set (Yes), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S4350.

[When winning]
Step S4350: The main control CPU 72 sets the jump destination of the jump table to “big winning variable winning device management process”. The main control CPU 72 executes processing for setting various functions to non-operation in this processing. Specifically, the probability variation function is deactivated and the time reduction function is deactivated. Thereby, before the special game (big player) is started, the state is shifted to the low probability non-time shortening state.

  Step S4400: Then, the main control CPU 72 sets “start of big role (during big hit game)” as an internal state flag for control. Further, the main control CPU 72 sets the value of the continuous operation number status according to the type of jackpot symbol. For example, when the type of jackpot symbol is “16 round symbols”, a value corresponding to “16 rounds” is set in the continuous operation count status. When the type of jackpot symbol is “9 round symbol 1” or “9 round symbol 2”, a value representing “9 rounds” is set in the continuous operation count status. Further, the main control CPU 72 generates a status command indicating that the big hit. The state command representing the big hit is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process.

  Step S4500: The main control CPU 72 generates a continuous operation number command. The continuous operation number command can be generated based on the type of jackpot symbol (stop symbol number) determined in the previous jackpot stop symbol determination process (step S2410 in FIG. 25). For example, when the type of jackpot symbol is “16 round symbols”, the continuous operation number command is generated as a value representing “16 rounds”. When the type of jackpot symbol is “9 round symbol 1” or “9 round symbol 2”, the continuous operation number command is generated as a value representing “9 rounds”. The generated continuous operation number command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process.

  When the above procedure is completed at the time of the big hit, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game process.

[When not winning]
On the other hand, the following procedure is executed in cases other than the big hit.
That is, if the main control CPU 72 determines in step S4300 that the value of the big hit flag (01H) is not set (No), it next executes step S4600.

  Step S4600: The main control CPU 72 next checks whether or not the value of the small hit flag (01H) is set. If the value of the small hit flag (01H) is not set and is simply shifted (No), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S4602.

  Step S4602: The main control CPU 72 sets the special symbol variation pre-processing address as the jump destination address of the jump table.

  Step S4605: On the other hand, if the value of the small hit flag (01H) is set (step S4600: Yes), the main control CPU 72 uses the address of the variable winning prize management device processing at the small hit as the jump destination address of the jump table. set.

  Step S4606: Then, the main control CPU 72 sets “small hit start (during small hit)” as an internal state flag for control. Further, the main control CPU 72 generates a status command indicating that a small hit is being made. The state command representing the small hit is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process.

  Step S4610: Next, the main control CPU 72 loads the value of the number cut counter. In the “counting counter”, the counter values are set in the probability variation count area and the time reduction count area of the RAM 76 in the “high probability state” and “time reduction state”. In the present embodiment, since the so-called frequency cut probability changing function is adopted, when shifting to the “high probability time reduction state”, the frequency cut counter relating to the high probability state is set to a predetermined numerical value (for example, 170 times), The turn-off counter for the time reduction state is set to a predetermined numerical value (for example, 170 times). In addition, in the case of shifting to the “low probability time shortening state”, the number cut counter relating to the high probability state is not set, and the number cut counter relating to the time shortening state is set to a predetermined numerical value (for example, 100 times).

  Step S4620: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the loaded counter value is zero. At this time, if the count cut counter value is already 0 (Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game process. On the other hand, when the count cut counter value is not 0 (No), after generating the count cut counter value command, the main control CPU 72 next executes step S4630.

Step S4630: The main control CPU 72 decrements (subtracts 1) the count-down counter value.
Step S4640: The main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the subtraction result is not zero. As a result of the subtraction, when the value of the number cut counter is not 0 (Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game process. On the other hand, if the value of the number cut counter becomes 0 (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S4650.

  Step S4650: Here, the main control CPU 72 resets a flag at the time of turning off the number of times function. In the present embodiment, when shifting to the “high probability time shortening state”, the count-off counter regarding the high probability state and the time shortening state is set to a predetermined numerical value (for example, 170 times), A special symbol probability state flag and a time shortening function operation flag. In addition, when shifting to the “low probability time shortening state”, the count-down counter relating to the time shortening state is set to a predetermined numerical value (for example, 100 times), so only the time shortening function operation flag is reset. is there. Thereby, the time shortening state and the high probability state are ended through the special symbol stop display. When the above procedure is completed, the process returns to the special symbol game process.

[Display output management processing]
Next, FIG. 36 is a flowchart illustrating a configuration example of the display output management process (step S210 in FIG. 10) executed in the interrupt management process. The display output management process includes a special symbol display setting process (step S1200), a normal symbol display setting process (step S1210), a state display setting process (step S1220), an operation memory display setting process (step S1230), and a continuous operation number display setting. This is a configuration including a subroutine group of processing (step S1240).

  Among these, the special symbol display setting process (step S1200), the normal symbol display setting process (step S1210), and the operation memory display setting process (step S1230) are the first special symbol display device 34, the second, as already described. Generates drive signals to be applied to the LEDs of the special symbol display device 35, the normal symbol display device 33, the normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a, the first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a, and the second special symbol operation memory number display lamp 35a. And output processing.

  The state display setting process (step S1220) and the continuous operation number display setting process (step S1240) are processes for generating and outputting a drive signal to be applied to each LED of the gaming state display device 38. First, in the state display setting process, the main control CPU 72 controls the lighting of the probability variation state display lamp 38d and the short time state display lamp 38e, respectively, according to the value of the special symbol probability state flag or the time shortening function operation flag. For example, if the value (01H) is set in the special symbol probability state flag when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the main control CPU 72 outputs a lighting signal to the LED corresponding to the probability variation state display lamp 38d. The probability variation state display lamp 38d continues to be lit until the jackpot game related to the special symbol is started or until the probability variation function is turned off after the special symbol variation display has been performed a predetermined number of times. The display can be switched (off). On the other hand, if the value (01H) is set in the time reduction function operation flag, the main control CPU 72 turns on the lighting signal for the LED corresponding to the time reduction state display lamp 38e regardless of whether or not the power is turned on. Is output. Further, the main control CPU 72 controls the lighting of the launch position designation lamp 38f in accordance with the special game management status. For example, when the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 is activated due to the big hit game or the small hit game, the main control CPU 72 outputs a lighting signal to the LED corresponding to the launch position designation lamp 38f. . If the value (01H) is set in the time reduction function operation flag, the main control CPU 72 gives a lighting signal to the LED corresponding to the launch position designation lamp 38f in addition to the above-mentioned time reduction state display lamp 38e. Output. Note that the launch position designation lamp 38f is turned on from the start of the big hit game until the end of the "time reduced state" when the game is shifted to the "time reduced state" through the big hit game, and is not turned on when the "time reduced state" ends ( OFF).

  The main control CPU 72 controls lighting of the big hit type display lamps 38a and 38b in the continuous operation number display setting process. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 outputs a lighting signal for one of the big hit type display lamps 38a and 38b based on the value of the above-mentioned continuous operation number status. At this time, one of the display lamps 38a and 38b corresponding to the jackpot symbol designated by the value of the continuous operation number status is the target of outputting the lighting signal. For example, if the value of the continuous operation count status designates “16 rounds”, the main control CPU 72 outputs a lighting signal to the lamp 38b representing “16 rounds (16R)”. If the value of the continuous operation count status specifies “9 rounds”, the main control CPU 72 outputs a lighting signal to the lamp 38 a representing “9 rounds (9R)”.

[Variable winning device management process for big hits]
Next, details of the big win variable winning device management process will be described. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing a configuration example of the big win variable winning device management process. The big hit time variable winning device management process is a big hit game process selection process (step S5100), a big hit time big winning opening opening pattern setting process (step S5200), a big hit big winning opening / closing operation process (step S5300), a big hit time big This is a configuration including a subroutine group of a winning opening closing process (step S5400) and a big hit end process (step S5500).

  Step S5100: In the big hit game process selection process, the main control CPU 72 selects the jump destination of the process to be executed next (any one of steps S5200 to S5500). That is, the main control CPU 72 selects the program address of the process to be executed next from the jump table as the jump destination address, and sets the end of the big win variable winning device management process in the stack pointer as the return address. Which process is selected as the next jump destination depends on the progress of the processes performed so far. For example, if the operation (opening / closing operation) of the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 has not been started yet, the main control CPU 72 sets the big hit time big winning opening opening pattern setting process as the next jump destination. (Step S5200) is selected. On the other hand, if the big hit special prize opening pattern setting process has already been completed, the main control CPU 72 selects the big hit special prize opening / closing operation processing (step S5300) as the next jump destination, and the big hit special prize opening / closing operation is performed. If the operation process has been completed, the big hit special prize closing process (step S5400) is selected as the next jump destination. When the big hit big prize opening / closing operation process and the big hit big prize opening closing process are repeatedly executed over the set number of continuous operations (number of rounds), the main control CPU 72 performs the big hit end process ( Step S5500) is selected. Hereinafter, each process will be described in more detail.

[Big prize opening pattern setting process for big hits]
FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the big winning opening big opening opening pattern setting process. This process is for setting conditions such as the number of times the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 is opened / closed and the time of each opening at the time of a big hit. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along each procedure.

  Step S5204: The main control CPU 72 executes a design-specific release pattern selection process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the winning pattern opening pattern (number of times of opening for each round and the time of each opening), the interval time between rounds, and the number of counts in one round (maximum) according to the current winning symbol. The number of wins) and the operation pattern of the probability changing area solenoid 99 are selected. The winning pattern opening pattern for each winning symbol, the operation pattern of the probability variation area solenoid 99, and the interval time between rounds are as described in the operation pattern of the variable winning device during the big hit shown in FIG. Note that the number of counts in one round (maximum number of winnings) is basically about 10, but winnings rarely occur during the opening for an extremely short time (about 0.1 seconds) (impossible). But not very difficult).

  Step S5206: The main control CPU 72 sets the number of execution rounds in the current jackpot game based on the winning symbol selected in the big jackpot stop symbol determination process (step S2410 in FIG. 25). Specifically, if the large category “16 round symbol” is selected as the winning symbol, the main control CPU 72 sets the number of execution rounds to 16 times. If “9 round symbol 1” or “9 round symbol 2” is selected as the winning symbol, the main control CPU 72 sets the number of execution rounds to nine. The number of execution rounds set here is stored in the buffer area of the RAM 76, for example, as a corresponding value on the program (“8” for 9 times, “15” for 16 times).

  Step S5208: Next, the main control CPU 72 counts the big hit opening timer and the probability change area timer (the probability change area release time) based on the big winning opening opening pattern and the operation pattern of the probability change area solenoid 99 set in the previous step S5204. Timer). The timer value set here is the opening time of the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 or the opening time of the probability changing area. If a time of about 20.0 to 29.0 seconds is set as the value of the big hit release timer and the probability change area timer, the release time is set to enter the big prize opening or the probability change during one release. This is a sufficient time (for example, a time when 10 or more game balls are fired by the firing control board set 174, preferably 6 seconds or more) when the region passes easily. On the other hand, if 0.1 seconds is set as the value of the big hit release timer and the probability change area timer, the release time is not incapable of entering the big prize opening or passing through the probability change area during one release. In both cases, it is a short time that hardly occurs (becomes difficult) (for example, a time shorter than 1 second, preferably a time shorter than a game ball firing interval by the launch control board set 174).

  Step S5210: Then, the main control CPU 72 temporarily sets the big hit interval timer and the probability variation region interval timer (probability variation region temporarily based on the large winning opening opening pattern and the operation pattern of the probability variation region solenoid 99 set in the previous step S5204. Set the timer to count the waiting time for closing. The timer value set here is a waiting time between rounds of big hit or a temporary closing time of the probability variation area.

  Step S5212: When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the big win time big opening / closing operation processing, and returns to the big win time variable winning device management processing (FIG. 37).

[Big prize opening and closing operation processing at big hit]
FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure for a big winning prize opening / closing operation process for a big hit. This process is for controlling the opening / closing operation of the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 at the time of big hit. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along a procedure.

  Step S5301: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the big prize winning interval timer is counting down. Specifically, it is possible to confirm whether or not the big prize opening interval timer is counting down by checking whether or not the big prize opening interval timer set in the following step S5314 is already operating. it can.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the big prize winning interval timer is counting down (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes Step S5314. On the other hand, if it is not possible to confirm that the big prize opening interval timer is counting down (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S5302.

  Step S5302: The main control CPU 72 opens the first big prize opening or the second big prize opening. Specifically, a drive signal to be applied to the first big prize opening solenoid 90 or the second big prize opening solenoid 97 is outputted based on the operation pattern of the variable winning device during the big hit shown in FIG. Thereby, the 1st variable winning device 30 or the 2nd variable winning device 31 operates, and it shifts from a closed state to an open state.

  Step S5303: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes an open timer countdown process. In this process, the countdown of the release timer set in the previous big hit big winning opening opening pattern setting process (step S5208 in FIG. 38) is executed.

  Step S5303a: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the probability variation area interval timer is counting down. Specifically, it can be confirmed whether or not the probability variation area interval timer is counting down by confirming whether or not the probability variation area interval timer set in the following step S5314 is already operating.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the probability variation area interval timer is counting down (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes Step S5314. On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that the probability variation area interval timer is counting down (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S5304.

  Step S5304: The main control CPU 72 executes probability variation area release processing. Specifically, based on the operation pattern of the variable winning device with a big hit shown in FIG. 24, a drive signal to be applied to the probability variation region solenoid 99 is output. As a result, the probability variation region blade member 31d is opened, and the game ball can be guided to the probability variation region disposed inside the second variable winning device 31.

  Step S5305: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a probability variation area timer countdown process. In this process, the countdown of the probability variation area timer set in the previous big hit big winning opening opening pattern setting process (step S5208 in FIG. 38) is executed.

  Step S5306: Subsequently, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the big winning opening opening time has ended. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the release timer after the countdown process is 0 or less. If the value of the release timer is not yet 0 or less (No), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S5307a. Execute.

  Step S5307a: Subsequently, the main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the probability variation area release time has expired. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the probability change area timer after the countdown process is 0 or less. If the value of the release timer is not yet 0 or less (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S5308. Run.

  On the other hand, when the value of the probability variation area timer is 0 or less (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S5307b.

  Step S5307b: Probability change area closing processing is executed. Specifically, a process of stopping the output of the drive signal applied to the probability variation region solenoid 99 is executed. As a result, the probability variation region blade member 31d is closed, and the game ball cannot be guided to the probability variation region disposed inside the second variable winning device 31.

  Step S5308: The main control CPU 72 executes a winning ball count process. In this process, the number of game balls won in the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 (the first large winning port or the second large winning port being opened) within the opening time is counted. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 increments the count value based on the winning detection signal input from the first count switch 84 or the second count switch 85 within the opening time.

  Step S5310: Next, the main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the current count number is less than a predetermined number (10). This predetermined number defines the upper limit of the number of winning balls (upper limit of the number of winning balls) allowed per opening (one round of big hit) as described above. If the count has not yet reached the predetermined number (Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the big win time variable winning device management process. Next, when the big win variable winning device management process is executed, since the jump destination is set to the big win big prize opening / closing operation process at the present stage, the main control CPU 72 performs the procedure of the above steps S5301 to S5310. Run repeatedly.

  If it is determined in step S5306 that the special winning opening opening time has ended (Yes), or if it is confirmed in step S5310 that the count has reached a predetermined number (No), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S5312. Run.

  Step S5312: The main control CPU 72 closes the first big prize opening or the second big prize opening. Specifically, the output of the drive signal applied to the first big prize opening solenoid 90 or the second big prize opening solenoid 97 is stopped. Thereby, the 1st variable winning device 30 or the 2nd variable winning device 31 shifts from an open state to a closed state.

  Step S5313: The main control CPU 72 executes a probability variation region closing process. Specifically, a process of stopping the output of the drive signal applied to the probability variation region solenoid 99 is executed. As a result, the probability variation region blade member 31d is closed, and the game ball cannot be guided to the probability variation region disposed inside the second variable winning device 31.

  Step S5314: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes an interval timer countdown process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 executes the countdown of the big prize opening interval timer and the probability variation area interval timer set in the big hit big prize opening pattern setting process (step S5210 in FIG. 38).

  Step S5315: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the big winning opening interval time has ended. Specifically, it is checked whether or not the value of the big prize opening interval timer after the countdown process is 0 or less. If the value of the big prize opening interval timer is not yet 0 or less (No), the main control is performed. The CPU 72 returns to the end address of the variable winning device management process (FIG. 37) at the big hit. Then, when the jackpot big winning opening / closing operation processing is executed in the next call, the process jumps from the top step S5301 and immediately executes step S5314. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the value of the big prize winning interval timer after the countdown process has become 0 or less (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes Step S5318.

  Step S5318: The main control CPU 72 increments the value of the opening number counter. Note that the value of the number-of-releases counter is stored in the count area of the RAM 76 with an initial value of 0, for example.

  Step S5320: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the value of the incremented number-of-releases counter has reached the number set within the current round. Here, the reason why the “number of times set in the current round” is determined is to deal with an opening pattern of “opening the variable winning device 31 multiple times within one round of big hit”, for example. . In this embodiment, for example, such an open pattern is adopted in the sixth round when it corresponds to “16 round symbol 1”, but from the first round when it corresponds to “16 round symbol 1”. Up to the fifth round, the “number of times set in the current round” is set once for each round. Accordingly, since the counter value reaches the number of times set by one opening / closing operation (Yes) in the first to fifth rounds in the case of “16 round symbol 1”, the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S5322. It will be.

  On the other hand, the sixth round in the case of “16 round symbol 1” adopts a pattern in which the opening / closing operation is repeated a plurality of times within one round, so the counter value is still set to the number of times set at the end of one opening. It will not be reached (No). In this case, when the main control CPU 72 returns to the big win variable winning device management process, since the jump destination is set to the big win big prize opening / closing operation process at this stage, the procedure from step S5301 to step S5320 is performed. Run repeatedly. As a result, the increment of the number-of-releases counter proceeds in step S5318, and when the counter value reaches the set number of times (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S5322.

  Step S5322: The main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the big winning big prize opening closing process, and returns to the big win variable winning device management process. Then, when the big win time variable winning device management process is executed, the main control CPU 72 next executes a big hit time big winning opening closing process.

[Closing the big prize at the big hit]
FIG. 40 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of the big winning prize closing closing process. The big winning time big winning opening closing process is for executing an error process, continuing the operation of the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31, and ending the operation. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along a procedure.

  Step S5420: The main control CPU 72 executes a special winning opening closing effective time timer countdown process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets an initial value in the special winning opening closing effective time timer, and then executes a process of counting down the timer as time elapses (every time this module is called). By executing this process, the main control CPU 72 executes a determination regarding the entering / exiting ball mismatch error state and the probability variation region abnormal passing error state after the lapse of the specified time from the end of each round game (after the ball sweeping time has elapsed). (Incoming / outgoing ball mismatch error state determination means, high probability state transition region abnormal passage error state determination means).

  Step S5422: Next, the main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the special winning opening closing effective time has elapsed. Specifically, if the value of the big winning opening closing effective time timer has not yet become 0, the main control CPU 72 determines that the big winning opening closing effective time has not elapsed (No). In this case, the main control CPU 72 ends this module and returns to the big win variable winning device management process (FIG. 37).

  Thereafter, when the value of the big prize opening closing effective time timer becomes 0 with the passage of time, the main control CPU 72 determines that the big winning prize opening closing effective time has passed (Yes), and executes the processing after step S5424. To do.

  Step S5424: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value of the second variable winning device winning / taking ball counter is zero.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the value of the second variable winning device winning / exiting ball counter is 0 (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes Step S5436. On the other hand, when it is not possible to confirm that the value of the second variable prize-winning device entry / exit counter is 0 (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S5426.

  Step S5426: The main control CPU 72 executes a special winning opening entrance / exit ball mismatch error monitoring time timer countdown process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets an initial value in the big winning opening entrance / exit ball mismatch error monitoring time timer, and then executes a process of counting down the timer as time elapses.

  Step S5428: Next, the main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the special winning opening entrance / exit ball mismatch error monitoring time has elapsed. Specifically, if the value of the winning prize entrance / exit ball mismatch error monitoring time timer is not yet 0, the main control CPU 72 determines that the winning prize entrance / exit ball mismatch error monitoring time has not elapsed (No). . In this case, the main control CPU 72 ends this module and returns to the big win variable winning device management process (FIG. 37).

  Thereafter, when the value of the big winning opening entrance / exit ball mismatch error monitoring time timer becomes 0 with the passage of time, the main control CPU 72 determines that the big winning opening entrance / exit ball mismatch error monitoring time has elapsed (Yes), and the step. The processing after S5430 is executed.

  Step S5430: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the big winning opening entrance and exit ball mismatch error flag is ON. The big winning opening entrance / exit ball mismatch error flag is stored in the RAM 76.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the big winning opening entrance / exit ball mismatch error flag is ON (Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the big winning variable variable winning device management process (FIG. 37). On the other hand, when it is not possible to confirm that the big winning opening entrance / exit ball mismatch error flag is ON (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S5432.

  Step S5432: The main control CPU 72 sets a special winning opening entrance / exit ball mismatch error flag to ON. This flag is stored in the RAM 76 and is set to OFF by the forced zero clear process at the time of power failure recovery.

Step S5434: The main control CPU 72 generates a special winning opening entrance / exit ball mismatch error generation designation command. Here, the command is composed of 2-byte information of a preceding value and a succeeding value. The command generated in this process stores a value (for example, AAH) indicating that it is a big winning entry / outgoing ball inconsistency error designation command in the preceding value, and a big winning opening / outgoing ball inconsistency error is shown in the subsequent value. A value indicating the occurrence (for example, 01H) is stored. The command generated here is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process (step S212 in FIG. 10).
When the process of step S5434 is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the big win time variable winning device management process (FIG. 37).

  Step S5436: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the big winning opening entrance / exit ball mismatch error flag is ON.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the special winning entrance entrance / exit ball mismatch error flag is ON (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes Step S5436. On the other hand, when it is not possible to confirm that the special winning entrance entrance / exit ball mismatch error flag is ON (No), the main control CPU 72 executes Step S5442.

  Step S5438: The main control CPU 72 sets the special winning opening entrance / exit ball mismatch error flag to OFF. The reason for turning off the flag here is that a situation has occurred in which the error has been resolved within the monitoring time.

  Step S5440: The main control CPU 72 generates a special winning opening entrance / exit ball mismatch error release designation command. The command generated in this process stores a value (for example, AAH) indicating that it is a big prize entrance / exit ball mismatch error designation command in the preceding value, and the big prize entrance entrance / exit ball mismatch error is canceled in the subsequent value. A value indicating this (for example, 00H) is stored. The command generated here is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process (step S212 in FIG. 10).

  Step S5442: The main control CPU 72 executes a probability variation area passing error target round determination process. Since this processing is the same as the content described in FIG. 14, the detailed processing content is omitted.

  Step S5444: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the value of the determination loop count is zero.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the value of the determination loop count is 0 (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes Step S5456. On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that the value of the number of determination loops is 0 (No), the main control CPU 72 executes Step S5446.

  Step S5446: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether the value of the open round identification value is not 2 (that is, short open).

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the value of the open round identification value is not 2 (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes Step S5456. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the value of the open round identification value is 2 (No), the main control CPU 72 executes Step S5446.

  Step S5448: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the value of the special symbol probability state preliminary flag is 1.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the value of the special symbol probability state preliminary flag is 1 (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes Step S5456. On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that the value of the special symbol probability state preliminary flag is 1 (No), the main control CPU 72 executes Step S5450.

  As described above, by executing the processing of step S5446 and step S5448, the main control CPU 72 makes it easy for the second variable winning device 31 (probability variation area) to open long and the game ball pass through the probability variation area. Nevertheless, it is possible to confirm whether or not the passing of the game ball has been detected by the probability variation area switch 95a (high probability state transition area non-passing error state determination means). Further, when the value of the special symbol probability state preliminary flag is 1, the main control CPU 72 can determine that the passing of the game ball has been detected by the probability variation area switch 95a, and the value of the special symbol probability state preliminary flag Is 0, it can be determined that the passing of a game ball has not been detected by the probability variation area switch 95a (high probability state transition area non-passing error state determination means).

  Step S5450: The main control CPU 72 executes processing for setting the address of the security timer setting ram set table. In this process, a process for acquiring a time during which an external information signal is continuously transmitted is executed with reference to a security timer setting ram set table (not shown).

  Step S5452: The main control CPU 72 executes a ram set process. By executing this processing, the main control CPU 72 transmits the transmission time (eg, for example) acquired in the previous step S5450 to the hall computer in the game hall through the external terminal board 160 in the external information processing (step S208 in FIG. 10). An external information signal (security information) can be transmitted for 30 seconds).

  Step S5454: The main control CPU 72 executes processing for generating a probability variation area non-passing error occurrence designation command (high probability state transition area non-passing error state occurrence information). The command generated here is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process (step S212 in FIG. 10).

  Step S5456: The main control CPU 72 executes a next round transition process. Details of the next round transition process will be described later.

  When the above processing is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the big win variable winning device management processing (FIG. 37).

[Next round migration process]
FIG. 41 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of the next round transition process. This next round transition process is for continuing the operation of the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 or terminating the operation. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along a procedure.

  Step S5402: The main control CPU 72 increments the round number counter. Thereby, for example, the value of the round number counter is “1” at the stage where the first round ends and the second round is reached.

  Step S5404: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the incremented round number counter value has reached the set number of execution rounds. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 refers to the value (1 to 15) of the round number counter after increment, and if the value is less than the set number of execution rounds (1 to 15 after 1 subtraction) (No) Next, step S5405 is executed.

  Step S5405: The main control CPU 72 generates a round number command from the current round number counter value. This command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process as described above. The effect control device 124 can confirm the current number of rounds based on the received round number command.

  Step S5406: The main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination in the big hit big prize opening / closing operation process.

  Step S5408: Then, the main control CPU 72 resets the winning ball number counter and returns to the big win time variable winning device management process.

  When the main control CPU 72 next executes the big hit variable winning device management process, the main control CPU 72 in the big hit game process selection process (step S5100 in FIG. 37), the big jump time big winning opening / closing operation process is the next jump destination. Execute. Then, after the execution of the big hit big prize opening / closing operation process, the main control CPU 72 executes the next round transition process again via the big hit big prize opening closing process, Steps S5402 to S5408 are repeatedly executed. Thereby, the opening / closing operation of the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 is continuously executed until the actual round number reaches the set execution round number (9 times or 16 times).

  When the actual number of rounds reaches the set number of execution rounds (step S5404: YES), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S5410.

  Step S5410, Step S5412: In this case, when the main control CPU 72 resets the round number counter (= 0), it sets the next jump destination to the big hit end processing.

  Step S5408: Then, the main control CPU 72 resets the winning ball counter, and returns to the big hit variable winning device management process via the big win big prize opening closing process. As a result, when the main control CPU 72 next executes the jackpot variable winning device management process, the jackpot end process is selected this time.

[End processing at jackpot]
FIG. 42 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of the big hit end processing. This big-hit end process is for preparing conditions for ending the operation of the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 at the time of the big hit. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along the example of a procedure.

  Step S5501: The main control CPU 72 executes a big hit end time timer countdown process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets an initial value for the jackpot end time timer, and then counts down the timer as time elapses (each time this module is called).

  Step S5502: Next, the main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the big hit end time has elapsed. Specifically, if the value of the big hit end time timer is not yet 0, the main control CPU 72 determines that the big hit end time has not elapsed (No). In this case, the main control CPU 72 ends this module and returns to the big win variable winning device management process (FIG. 37).

  Thereafter, when the value of the big hit time end timer becomes 0 with the passage of time, the main control CPU 72 determines that the big hit time end time has passed (Yes), and executes step S5503 and subsequent steps.

  Step S5503, Step S5504: The main control CPU 72 resets the big hit flag (00H). As a result, the big hit gaming state ends on the control processing of the main control CPU 72. In addition, the main control CPU 72 deletes “big hit” from the internal state flag and declares the end of the major role as the internal state in the control processing. The main control CPU 72 resets the value of the continuous operation number status.

  Step S5505a: Next, the main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the value (01H) of the special symbol probability state preliminary flag is set. The special symbol probability state preliminary flag is stored in the RAM 76, and is set to ON in the process when the probability variation region passes (step S21 in FIG. 11).

  Step S5505b: When the value of the special symbol probability state preliminary flag is set (Yes), the main control CPU 72 sets the special symbol probability state flag to ON. If the value of the special symbol probability state preliminary flag is not set (No), the main control CPU 72 does not execute step S5505b.

  Step S5506: Next, the main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the value of the special symbol probability state flag is ON (= 01H).

  Step S5508: When the value of the special symbol probability state flag is ON (Yes), the main control CPU 72 sets the probability variation number (for example, 170 times). The set value of the probability variation number is stored, for example, in the probability variation counter area of the RAM 76 and becomes the above-described number cut counter value. The probability variation number set here is the upper limit number of times that the variation of the special symbol (internal lottery) is performed in a high probability state in the subsequent games. In the present embodiment, since a substantial upper limit is set for the high probability state, the winning result may not be obtained in the high probability state, and the state may return to the low probability state (so-called frequency cut probability change). When the value of the special symbol probability state flag is OFF (= 00H) (No), the main control CPU 72 does not execute step S5508.

  Step S5510: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value of the time shortening function activation flag is ON (01H. This flag is used for the big hit time other setting process during the previous special symbol fluctuation pre-processing (see FIG. 25 is set in step S2414).

  Step S5512: If the value of the time reduction function operation flag is ON (step S5510: Yes), the main control CPU 72 sets the number of time reductions (for example, 100 times or 170 times). Here, which number of shortening times is set depends on the value of the special symbol probability state flag. That is, when the value of the special symbol probability state flag is ON, the main control CPU 72 sets 170 times as the number of time reductions (high probability time reduction state transition means, advantageous game state transition means), and sets the special symbol probability state flag. When the value is OFF, 100 is set as the number of time reductions (low probability time reduction state transition means, advantageous game state transition means). The value of the set time reduction count is stored in the time count area of the RAM 76 as described above. The number of times of time reduction set here is the upper limit number of times to shorten the variation time of the special symbol in subsequent games. If the value of the time shortening function activation flag is not set (step S5510: No), the main control CPU 72 does not execute step S5512.

  Step S5514: Then, the main control CPU 72 generates a state designation command based on various flags. Specifically, a state designation command representing “normal” is generated as the gaming state when the big hit flag is reset or the big game ends. Also, if the special symbol probability state flag is set, a state designation command indicating “high probability” is generated as the internal state, and if the time reduction function operation flag is set, the internal state is Is generated. These state designation commands are transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process.

  Step S5516: After the above procedure, the main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination in the big hit time big winning opening releasing pattern setting process.

  Step S5518: Then, the main control CPU 72 sets the jump destination in the execution selection process (step S1000 in FIG. 23) in the special symbol game process as the special symbol change pre-process. When the above procedure is finished, the main control CPU 72 returns to the big win variable winning device management process.

[Variable winning device management process for small hits]
Next, details of the small winning time variable winning device management process will be described. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing a configuration example of the small winning hour variable winning device management process. The small winning time prize winning device management process includes a small winning game process selection process (step S6100), a small winning time big prize opening opening pattern setting process (step S6200), and a small hitting big prize opening opening / closing operation process (step S6300). The sub-group includes a subroutine group of a small winning big prize opening closing process (step S6400) and a small winning end process (step S6500).

  Step S6100: In the small hit game process selection process, the main control CPU 72 selects a jump destination of a process to be executed next (any one of steps S6200 to S6500). That is, the main control CPU 72 selects the program address of the process to be executed next from the jump table as the jump destination address, and sets the end of the small winning hour variable winning device management process in the stack pointer as the return address. . Which process is selected as the next jump destination depends on the progress of the processes performed so far. For example, if the operation (opening / closing operation) of the first variable winning device 30 has not started yet, the main control CPU 72 selects the small winning big opening opening pattern setting process (step S6200) as the next jump destination. To do. On the other hand, if the small winning big winning opening opening pattern setting processing has already been completed, the main control CPU 72 selects the small winning big winning opening opening / closing operation processing (step S6300) as the next jump destination, If the winning opening / closing operation processing has been completed, the small winning big winning opening closing process (step S6400) is selected as the next jump destination. When the small hitting big winning opening opening / closing operation process and the small hitting big winning opening closing process are repeatedly executed over the set number of continuous operations, the main control CPU 72 performs the small hitting end process (step) as the next jump destination. S6500) is selected. Hereinafter, each process will be described in more detail.

[Big winning opening opening pattern setting process for small hits]
FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure for the small winning big opening opening pattern setting process. This process is for setting conditions such as the number of times that the first variable prize-winning device 30 is opened and closed at the time of a small hit and the time for each opening. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along each procedure.

  Step S6212: The main control CPU 72 sets a “small hit opening pattern”. In the case of the present embodiment, for the “small hit opening pattern”, for example, an opening pattern of “0.1 second opening” is set for the first time and the second time. Since “small hit” has no concept of “round”, “open pattern” is also expressed as “first open” and “second open”.

  Step S6214: The main control CPU 72 sets the number of times of opening of the big prize opening to, for example, two based on the big winning opening opening pattern set in the previous step S6212. The number of releases set here is stored in a buffer area of the RAM 76, for example.

  Step S6216: Next, the main control CPU 72 sets a small hitting release timer. The timer value set here is the opening time per operation when the first variable winning device 30 is operated. In the present embodiment, as described above, 0.1 seconds is set as the value of the small hit release timer, and in such an open time, most of the winnings at the big prize opening occur during one open. No (becomes difficult) short time (for example, a time shorter than one second, preferably a time shorter than the interval between game balls fired by the launcher unit).

  Step S6218: The main control CPU 72 sets a small hitting interval timer. The timer value set here is a waiting time for each time when the first variable prize-winning apparatus 30 is opened and closed a plurality of times at the time of a small hit, and this timer value is set to about 2 seconds, for example.

  Step S6220: When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the small winning big prize opening / closing operation processing and returns to the small winning variable winning device management process (FIG. 43). The main control CPU 72 then executes a small winning big prize opening / closing operation process (step S6300).

[Large winning opening and closing operation processing for small hits]
FIG. 45 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of a small winning big prize opening / closing operation process. This process is for controlling the opening / closing operation of the first variable winning device 30 at the time of a small hit. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along a procedure.

  Step S6301: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the interval timer is counting down. Specifically, it can be confirmed whether or not the interval timer is counting down by confirming whether or not the interval timer set in the following step S6314 is already operating.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the interval timer is counting down (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes Step S6314. On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that the interval timer is counting down (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S6302.

  Step S6302: The main control CPU 72 opens the first big prize opening. Specifically, a drive signal applied to the first grand prize winning solenoid 90 is output. Thereby, the 1st variable prize-winning apparatus 30 operate | moves and it transfers to an open state from a closed state.

  Step S6304: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes an open timer countdown process. In this process, the countdown of the release timer set in the previous small hitting big opening opening pattern setting process (step S6216 in FIG. 44) is executed.

  Step S6306: Subsequently, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the opening time has expired. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the release timer after the countdown process is 0 or less. If the value of the release timer is not yet 0 or less (No), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S6308. Execute.

  Step S6308: The main control CPU 72 executes a winning ball count process. In this process, the number of game balls won in the first variable prize-winning device 30 (first big prize opening being opened) within the opening time is counted. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 increments the count value based on the winning detection signal input from the first count switch 84 within the opening time.

  Step S6310: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current count number is less than a predetermined number (10). This predetermined number defines the upper limit of the number of winning balls (upper limit of the number of winning balls) allowed per opening (one opening at the time of a small hit) as described above. If the count number has not yet reached the predetermined number (Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the small winning time variable winning device management process (FIG. 43). Next, when the small winning hour variable winning device management process is executed, since the jump destination is set to the small winning big prize opening / closing operation process at the present stage, the main control CPU 72 performs the above steps S6301 to S6310. Repeat the procedure.

  If it is determined in step S6306 that the opening time has expired (Yes), or if it is confirmed in step S6310 that the count has reached a predetermined number (No), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S6312. Here, since the value of the release timer is set for a short time, the main control CPU 72 normally performs step opening before confirming that the count number has reached the predetermined number in step S6310. In most cases, it is determined in S6306 that the opening time has expired.

  Step S6312: The main control CPU 72 closes the first big prize opening. Specifically, the output of the drive signal applied to the first grand prize winning solenoid 90 is stopped. Thereby, the 1st variable prize-winning apparatus 30 returns from an open state to a closed state.

  Step S6314: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes an interval timer countdown process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 executes the count-down of the interval timer set in the above-mentioned small hitting big prize opening opening pattern setting process (step S6218 in FIG. 44).

  Step S6315: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the interval time has ended. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the interval timer after the countdown process is 0 or less. If the value of the interval timer is not yet 0 or less (No), the main control CPU 72 can change the small hit time. Return to the end address of the winning device management process (FIG. 43). Then, when the small winning big prize opening / closing operation process is executed in the next call, the process jumps from the top step S6301 and immediately executes step S6314. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the value of the interval timer after the countdown process has become 0 or less (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S6316.

  Step S6316: The main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the small winning big winning opening closing process, and returns to the small winning variable winning device management process. Next, when the small winning hour variable winning device management process is executed, the main control CPU 72 next executes a small hitting big prize opening closing process.

[Closed big prize opening closing process]
FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the small winning big prize opening closing process. The small winning big winning opening closing process is for continuing the operation of the first variable winning device 30 or terminating the operation. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along a procedure.

  Step S6412: The main control CPU 72 increments the value of the opening number counter.

  Step S6414: Next, the main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the value of the incremented number-of-releases counter has reached the set number of times of release. The number of times of opening is set in the previous winning opening opening pattern setting process (step S6214 in FIG. 44). If the value of the opening number counter has not yet reached the set opening number (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S6416.

Step S6416: The main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the big hit prize opening / closing operation process.
Step S6430: Then, the main control CPU 72 resets the winning ball counter and returns to the small hitting time variable winning device management process (FIG. 43).

  When the main control CPU 72 next executes the variable winning device management process, the main control CPU 72 performs a small winning game big opening / closing operation process in the small jump game process selection process (step S6100 in FIG. 43). Execute. After executing the small winning big prize opening / closing operation process, the main control CPU 72 again executes the small winning big prize opening closing process until the actual number of times of opening reaches the set number of opening times (two times). The opening / closing operation of the first variable winning device 30 is repeatedly executed.

  When the actual number of times of opening at the time of the small hit reaches the set number of times of opening (step S6414: Yes), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S6418.

  Step S6418, Step S6420: In this case, when the main control CPU 72 resets the release number counter (= 0), it sets the next jump destination to the small hit end processing.

  Step S6430: Then, the main control CPU 72 resets the winning ball counter and returns to the small hitting time variable winning device management process (FIG. 43). As a result, when the main control CPU 72 next executes the variable winning device management process, the small hitting end process is selected this time.

[End processing for small hits]
FIG. 47 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of the small hit end processing. This small hitting end process is for preparing conditions for ending the operation of the first variable winning device 30 at the small hitting. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along the example of a procedure.

  Step S6502: The main control CPU 72 executes a small hitting end time timer countdown process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets an initial value for the small hitting end time timer, and then counts down the timer as time elapses (each time this module is called).

  Step S6504: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the small hitting end time has elapsed. Specifically, if the value of the small hitting end time timer is not yet 0, the main control CPU 72 determines that the small hitting end time has not elapsed (No). In this case, the main control CPU 72 ends the present module and returns to the small winning time variable winning device management process (FIG. 43).

  Thereafter, when the value of the small hitting end time timer becomes 0 with the passage of time, the main control CPU 72 determines that the small hitting end time has elapsed (Yes), and executes step S6506 and subsequent steps.

  Step S6506, Step S6508: The main control CPU 72 resets the value of the small hit flag (00H), deletes “meeting small hit” from the internal state flag, and ends the small hit game. It should be noted that in the case of a small hit, the internal condition device does not operate in particular, so such a procedure is merely for the purpose of erasing the flag.

  Step S6510: After the above procedure, the main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination in the small winning big opening opening pattern setting process.

  Step S6512: The main control CPU 72 sets the jump destination in the execution selection process (step S1000 in FIG. 23) in the special symbol game process as the special symbol variation pre-process. When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the small winning time variable winning device management process.

  FIG. 48 is a timing chart showing temporal changes in the winning pattern opening pattern and effect contents for each winning symbol. Hereinafter, a description will be given along a time series.

[At the time of winning 9 round symbols 1]
In FIG. 48 (A): From the first round to the fifth round, ON and OFF of the first big prize opening solenoid 90 are alternately repeated five times, and the first variable winning device 30 is opened and closed five times. repeat. From the 1st round to the 5th round, a long opening (29 seconds opening) is performed. In the sixth round, ON and OFF of the first big prize opening solenoid are repeated four times in a short period during the round, and the first variable winning device 30 repeats opening and closing four times. The sixth round is a short opening (0.1 second opening is 4 times).

  In FIG. 48 (B): From the seventh round to the ninth round, ON and OFF of the second big prize opening solenoid 97 are repeated three times in a short period of time, and the second variable prize winning device 31 opens and closes three times. Repeat once. From the 7th round to the 9th round, a short is opened (0.1 second is opened).

  In FIG. 48 (C): As the contents of the effect, the battle effect is executed in the first to fifth rounds, the defeat effect is executed in the sixth round, and the defeat effect is continued in the seventh to ninth rounds. .

[At the time of winning 9 round symbols 2]
In FIG. 48 (D): From the first round to the fifth round, ON and OFF of the first big prize opening solenoid 90 are alternately repeated five times, and the first variable prize winning device 30 is opened and closed five times. repeat. From the 1st round to the 5th round, a long opening (29 seconds opening) is performed. In the sixth round, ON and OFF of the first big prize opening solenoid are repeated four times in a short period during the round, and the first variable winning device 30 repeats opening and closing four times. The sixth round is a short opening (0.1 second opening is 4 times).

  In FIG. 48 (E): In the seventh round, the second big prize opening solenoid 97 is turned on and off once, and the second variable prize winning device 31 opens and closes once. The seventh round is long open (29 seconds open). In the 8th and 9th rounds, ON and OFF of the second big prize opening solenoid 97 are repeated twice in a short period, and the second variable prize winning device 31 repeats opening and closing twice. The eighth and ninth rounds are short open (0.1 second open).

  In FIG. 48 (F): As the contents of the effect, a battle effect is executed in the first to fifth rounds, a victory effect is executed in the sixth round, and a V prize-related effect is executed in the seventh to ninth rounds. Is done. In the V prize-related effect, when the game ball passes the probability variation area, an effect is transmitted to the player that the V prize has occurred, and when the game ball does not pass the probability variation area, the V An effect of transmitting to the player that no winning has occurred is executed.

[At the time of winning 9 round symbols 2]
In FIG. 48 (G): From the first round to the sixth round, ON and OFF of the first big prize opening solenoid 90 are alternately repeated six times, and the first variable prize winning device 30 opens and closes six times. repeat. From the 1st round to the 6th round, a long opening (29 seconds opening) is performed. Further, from the 10th round to the 16th round, ON and OFF of the first big prize opening solenoid 90 are alternately repeated seven times, and the first variable prize winning device 30 repeats opening and closing seven times. The 10th to 16th rounds are long open (29 seconds open).

  In FIG. 48 (H): From the seventh round to the ninth round, the second large prize opening solenoid 97 is alternately turned on and off three times, and the second variable prize winning device 31 is opened and closed three times. repeat. From the 7th round to the 9th round, long open (29 seconds open).

  In FIG. 48, (I): As the contents of the effect, the big-game effect dedicated to the 16th round jackpot is executed from the 1st round to the 16th round. For the seventh to ninth rounds during the big role production, the above V prize-related production can be executed.

  Although the operation timing of the probability variation region solenoid 99 is not particularly illustrated, it operates when the second variable winning device 31 operates.

[Error handling contents related to fraud etc.]
49 to 52 are diagrams illustrating details of error processing contents relating to fraud and the like.
The pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment executes error processing with the contents described in these drawings by the main control device 70 or the effect control device 124. The contents of the described error processing may not be executed depending on the corresponding model.

  First, the “priority order” in the upper part of the figure indicates the priority when an error state is notified. For example, when the RAM clear with the first priority and the illegal winning error with the second priority occur at the same time, a RAM clear notification process (lamp lighting, voice notification, liquid crystal notification) with a high priority is executed. . However, processes other than the notification process (for example, command transmission process) can be executed in parallel regardless of the priority order. As for the priority order, the order of high priority is assigned to those that have a high possibility of affecting the progress of the game such as fraud and malfunction.

  “Error name” indicates the name of the error state. The “glass frame error notification LED” corresponds to the two LED lamps 46b on the upper side of the glass frame top lamp 46 of FIG. “Glass frame decoration LED” includes six LED lamps 46 a of the glass frame top lamp 46 of FIG. 4, nine LED lamps 48 a to 48 g of the left glass frame decoration lamp 48, and nine of the right glass frame decoration lamp 50. The 19 LED lamps 52 a to 52 s of the LED lamps 50 a to 50 g and the left and right glass frame decoration lamps 52 correspond to this. The “G board decoration LED” corresponds to the LED lamps 53a to 52f of the board surface lamp 53 of FIG.

  “Voice notification” represents the content of the voice and warning sound output from the speakers 54, 55, and 56. “Liquid crystal notification” represents the contents of character information and the like displayed on the liquid crystal display 42.

The “error occurrence condition” represents a requirement as to what condition should be assumed to cause the error.
“Error canceling condition” represents a requirement regarding what condition an error that has occurred is cancelled.

  “External information” represents the content of a signal transmitted to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 through the external terminal board 160. “Remarks” indicates the detailed contents of the error, exceptional contents, the type of model to which the error is applied, and the like. When each error cancellation condition in the figure is different from the error cancellation condition in the detailed description of the error in the following description, each error cancellation condition in the figure is an error cancellation condition of the production control device 124, and the following The error cancellation condition in the detailed description of the error in the description is the error cancellation condition of the main controller 70. Hereinafter, the contents of each error will be specifically described in the order of priority.

[RAM clear]
Priority: 1
Notification LED on glass frame: Blue lighting Glass decoration LED: All lighting (full color: red lighting)
G board decoration LED: All off Voice alert: “Memory cleared” (can be voice dependent on the model)
LCD notification: “None” (display of default screen (normal game screen))
Error occurrence condition: RAM clear Error release condition: 31 seconds after error occurrence External information: 30 seconds output (security signal is output for 30 seconds)
Remarks: None

  Here, the difference between “output for x seconds” and “output during abnormality detection” in the figure is that “output for x seconds” continues to output an external signal until x seconds elapse, while “output during abnormality detection”. Continues to output an external signal until the error is reset or the abnormal state is canceled due to power-off (for example, in the case of an incoming / outgoing ball inconsistency error, the incoming / outgoing ball coincidence is detected by releasing a clogged ball, etc.)

[Unauthorized winning error]
Priority: 2
Notification LED on glass frame: Blue lighting Glass decoration LED: All lighting (full color: red lighting)
G board decoration LED: All lights off Voice alert: Warning sound and “Unauthorized winnings detected”
LCD alert: “Unauthorized winnings detected”
Error occurrence conditions: (A) When 5 or more game balls are won in the big prize opening other than during the operation of the special electric accessory (first variable winning device 30 or second variable winning device 31), (B) normal electric In addition to the winning action of the bonus item (variable start winning device 28), when five or more game balls are won in the ordinary electric accessory (right start winning port 28a), or (C) all other winning points (ordinary in 60 seconds) When more than the specified number of game balls have been won in the winning openings 22 and 24) Error release condition: 60 seconds after error occurrence External information: Output for 30 seconds Remarks: Each of the above condition numerical values must be set according to the model. Can do. In the case of eight reserved models (models that can store the maximum number of the first special symbol memory and the second special symbol memory at least in the low probability non-time shortened state), the above-mentioned ordinary electric combination (B) The illegal prize winning error is unused.

[Details of illegal winning error]
Unauthorized winning errors include ordinary electric power illegal winning errors and special electric power illegal winning errors.
(1) Unauthorized Winning Electric Power Award Error (a) Error Conditions After the effective period of closing the normal electric utility winning prize opening has elapsed or after canceling the Unusual Electric Power Prize Winning Error, the number of winning balls to the right starting port will be counted and the next ordinary If the number of winning balls reaches 5 before the start of the process related to the electric accessory, an error occurs.
(A) Error processing The security signal output to the external terminal board 160 is turned on for 30 seconds.
In addition, a transmission error for designation of occurrence of a general electric power wrong prize error is transmitted to the production control device 124.
(C) Error canceling condition The main controller 70 cancels immediately after detecting an error (no processing is performed).

(2) Special electric fraud winning error (a) Error conditions After the operation of the condition equipment or after the special electric power illegal winning error is released, the counting of the number of winning balls to the big winning mouth is started, and the winning ball to the big winning mouth not subject to operation If the number reaches 5, an error occurs.
(A) Error processing The security signal output to the external terminal board 160 is turned on for 30 seconds.
Also, a special electric power illegal winning error occurrence designation command is transmitted to the effect control device 124.
(C) Error canceling condition The main controller 70 cancels immediately after detecting an error (no processing is performed).

[Radio wave error]
Priority: 3
Notification LED on glass frame: Blue lighting Glass decoration LED: All lighting (full color: red lighting)
G board decoration LED: All lights off Voice alert: Warning sound and “Radio wave detected”
LCD notification: Radio wave detected Error 1 to 3 Please call staff Error occurrence condition: (A) When radio wave detection or (B) Radio wave sensor disconnection detection Error release condition: 60 seconds after error occurrence External information: Output for 30 seconds Remarks: The display of errors 1 to 3 varies depending on the detection location.

[Details of radio wave error]
(A) Error occurrence condition An error occurs when the radio wave detection sensors 1 to 3 from the radio wave detection sensor 206 are monitored and an ON state is detected. In this example, it is assumed that the radio wave detection sensor 206 is attached to three different places (radio wave detection sensors 1 to 3).
(A) Error processing The security signal output to the external terminal board 160 is turned on for 30 seconds.
Also, a radio wave error 1 occurrence designation command, a radio wave error 2 occurrence designation command, or a radio wave error 3 occurrence designation command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 according to the detected location. In addition, about a command, you may set one command irrespective of a detection location.
(C) Error cancellation condition The radio wave detection sensors 1 to 3 from the radio wave detection sensor 206 are monitored, and when an OFF state is detected, the error is canceled, and the radio wave error 1 cancellation designation command and the radio wave error 2 cancellation are performed according to the cancellation location. A designation command or a radio wave error 3 release designation command is transmitted to the effect control device 124. As for the command, one command may be set regardless of the release location.

[Magnetic error]
Priority: 4
Notification LED on glass frame: Blue lighting Glass decoration LED: All lighting (full color: red lighting)
G board decoration LED: All lights off Voice alert: Warning sound and “Magnet detected”
LCD notification: Detected magnet Error 1-3 Please call staff Error occurrence condition: (A) When magnetism is detected or (B) Magnetic sensor disconnection is detected Error release condition: Until power is turned off External information: Output during abnormality detection (Continues output until the power is turned off)
Note: The display of errors 1 to 3 varies depending on the detected location.

[Details of magnetic error]
Magnetic errors include magnetic error 1, magnetic error 2, and magnetic error 3.
(1) Magnetic error 1
(A) Error occurrence condition An error occurs when the magnetic detection sensor signal arranged near the out port 32 is monitored and the ON state continues for 100 ms.
(A) Error processing The security signal output to the external terminal board 160 is turned on.
Also, a magnetic error 1 occurrence designation command is transmitted to the effect control device 124.
(C) Error canceling condition The magnetic detection sensor signal arranged near the out port 32 is monitored, and when the OFF state continues for 100 ms, the error is canceled, the security signal output to the external terminal board 160 is turned OFF, and the magnetic error 1 A cancel designation command is transmitted to the effect control device 124.

(2) Magnetic error 2
(A) Error occurrence condition An error occurs when the on-board magnetic field detection sensor 1 signal arranged in the game board unit 8 is monitored and the ON state continues for 100 ms.
(A) Error processing The security signal output to the external terminal board 160 is turned on.
Also, a magnetic error 2 generation designation command is transmitted to the effect control device 124.
(C) Error release condition The board surface magnetism detection sensor 1 signal arranged in the game board unit 8 is monitored, and when the OFF state continues for 100 ms, the error is released, the security signal output to the external terminal board 160 is turned off, and the magnetic An error 2 release designation command is transmitted to the effect control device 124.

(3) Magnetic error 3
(A) Error occurrence condition An error occurs when the board magnetic field detection sensor 2 signal arranged at a position different from the board magnetic field detection sensor 1 in the game board unit 8 is monitored and the ON state continues for 100 ms.
(A) Error processing The security signal output to the external terminal board 160 is turned on.
Also, a magnetic error 3 occurrence designation command is transmitted to the effect control device 124.
(C) Error canceling condition The surface magnetism detection sensor 2 signal is monitored, the error is canceled when the OFF state continues for 100 ms, the security signal output to the external terminal board 160 is turned OFF, and the magnetic error 3 canceling designation command is effect-controlled. To device 124.

[Probability variation area abnormal passing error]
Priority: 5
Notification LED on glass frame: Blue lighting Glass decoration LED: All lighting (full color: red lighting)
G board decoration LED: All lights off Voice alert: None LCD alert: Probability variation area abnormal passing detected Call an agent Error condition: Game ball to the probability variation area during the short opening round of the big winning entrance with the probability variation area Error detection condition: Until power is turned off External information: Output during abnormality detection (Output continues until power is turned off)
Remarks: Not used on models that do not have a probability variation area

[Details of probability variation area abnormal passing error]
(A) Error occurrence condition 9 round symbol 1 (probability variation area short open symbol) The actuating condition device is activated by the winning condition device, and the probability variation region switch 95a detects the game ball when the probability variation region is valid. An error occurs.
(A) Error processing The security signal output to the external terminal board 160 is turned on.
In addition, a probability variation region abnormal passage error occurrence designation command is transmitted to the effect control device 124.
(C) Error release condition When the power is turned on again after the power is turned off, the security signal output to the external terminal board 160 is turned off.

  By executing such processing, when it is determined that the main control device 70 is in the probability variation region abnormal passage error state, an error state is occurring for the external device (external terminal board, hall computer). A probability change region abnormal passage error occurrence designation command (high probability state transition region abnormal passage error state) indicating that a probability variation region abnormal passage error state has occurred from the main control device 70 to the effect control device 124. (Occurrence information) can be transmitted (high probability state transition region abnormal passage error state processing execution means).

  Further, by executing such processing, the main control device 70 is in an error state with respect to the external device when the power is turned on again after the power is turned off when the probability variation region abnormal passing error state occurs. It is possible to stop sending a security signal indicating that the occurrence of the error is occurring (high probability state transition region abnormal passage error state cancellation time processing execution means).

[Large winning mouth abnormal discharge error]
Priority: 6
Notification LED on glass frame: Blue lighting Glass decoration LED: All lighting (full color: red lighting)
G board decoration LED: All lights off Voice alert: Warning sound + “abnormal discharge detected”
LCD alert: An abnormal discharge of a big prize opening was detected Error condition: When passing a game ball to the probability changing area or the outlet is detected even though the prize winning area with the probability changing area has not been won : After 60 seconds from error occurrence External information: Output for 30 seconds

[Details of extraordinary prize outlet abnormal discharge error]
(A) Error occurrence condition An error occurs when the probability change area switch 95a or the discharge port switch 95b detects a game ball even though the second count switch 85 does not detect the game ball.
(A) Error processing The security signal output to the external terminal board 160 is turned on for 30 seconds.
Also, a special winning opening abnormal discharge error occurrence designation command is transmitted to the effect control device 124.
(C) Error canceling condition The main controller 70 cancels immediately after detecting an error (no processing is performed).

  By executing such processing, when it is determined that the main control device 70 is in the abnormal discharge error state, the external control device (until the specified time (30 seconds) elapses after the abnormal discharge error state occurs). A security signal indicating that an error state is occurring to the external terminal board or hall computer), and a big prize opening indicating that an abnormal discharge error state has occurred from the main control device 70 to the effect control device 124 An abnormal discharge error occurrence designation command can be transmitted (abnormal discharge error state occurrence processing execution means).

  Further, by executing such processing, the main controller 70 can immediately release the abnormal discharge error state without performing any special processing when the abnormal discharge error state occurs (abnormal discharge error state). Release processing execution means).

[Large prize entry / exit mismatch error]
Priority: 7
Notification LED on glass frame: Blue lighting Glass decoration LED: All lighting (full color: red lighting)
G board decoration LED: All lights off Voice alert: warning sound + “I / O ball mismatch detected”
LCD alert: Detected disagreement with ball in / out of winning prize Please call a clerk Error conditions: Winning ball and exiting ball of winning hole with probability changing area (number of passing balls of probability changing area switch 95a and outlet switch 95b) If the two do not match Error cancellation condition: Until the match between the winning ball and the discharged ball or until the power is turned off External information: Output during abnormality detection (The output continues until the power is turned off)
Remarks: Not used on models that do not have a probability variation area

[Details of the inconsistency error in the big prize winning and exiting ball]
(A) Error occurrence condition When the great winning opening closing effective time of the second variable winning device 31 has elapsed, the number of winning balls due to the second count switch 85 detecting a game ball, the probability changing area switch 95a and the outlet opening switch 95b When the number of discharged balls due to the detection of a game ball is compared and they do not match, an error occurs.
(A) Error processing The operation of the second variable winning device 31 (special electric accessory) is stopped until the number of winning balls matches the number of discharged balls.
Also, the security signal to be output to the external terminal board 160 is turned on 33 seconds after the start of the operation of the second variable winning device 31 in the round in which the error has occurred, and the large winning entry entrance / exit ball mismatch error occurrence designation command is sent to the effect control device 124. Send.
(C) Error cancellation condition When the number of winning balls matches the number of discharged balls, or when the power is turned on again after the power is turned off, the error is canceled and the operation of the second variable winning device 31 is resumed.
Further, the security signal output to the external terminal board 160 is turned off, and a special winning opening entrance / exit ball mismatch error release designation command is transmitted to the effect control device 124.

  By executing such processing, the main control device 70 stops the operation of the second variable winning device 31 when it is determined that it is in the big winning entrance entrance / exit ball mismatch error state, and the big winning entrance entrance / exit ball mismatch. When an error condition occurs, an error condition is occurring for an external device (external terminal board, hall computer) after a lapse of a certain time (after 33 seconds) from the start of the operation of the second variable winning device 31 of the round game. A security signal indicating that there is a big winning entry entrance / exit ball inconsistency error state indicating that a main winning entry entrance / exit ball inconsistency error state has occurred from the main control device 70 to the effect control device 124 is transmitted (incoming / outgoing ball inconsistency error). (Status occurrence information) can be transmitted (incoming / outgoing ball mismatch error status occurrence processing execution means).

  Further, the main control device 70 is configured to supply power when the number of winning balls and the number of discharged balls of the second variable winning device 31 coincide with each other when the big winning opening entrance / exit ball mismatch error state occurs, or after the power is turned off. Is restarted, the operation of the second variable winning device 31 is resumed, the transmission of the security signal indicating that an error state is occurring to the external device is stopped, and the main control device 70 performs the effect control. It is possible to transmit to the device 124 a special winning entrance entrance / exit ball inconsistency error release designation command (entry / outgoing ball inconsistency error status release information) indicating that the incredible entrance / exit ball inconsistency error state has been released (entry / outgoing ball inconsistency error status information). State release process execution means).

[Vibration error]
Priority: 8
Notification LED on glass frame: Blue lighting Glass decoration LED: All lighting (full color: red lighting)
G board decoration LED: All lights off Voice alert: Warning sound and “Vibration detected”
LCD alarm: Vibration detected Error occurrence condition: When vibration error occurred Error release condition: 60 seconds after error occurrence External information: Output for 30 seconds Remarks: Not used on models without a vibration sensor. It is detected only when the special electric accessory is operating. If it is detected at a certain time (5 seconds) after the door is closed, no voice notification is given.

[Details of vibration error]
(A) Error occurrence condition An error occurs when the vibration detection sensor 1 signal from the vibration detection sensor 204 is monitored during operation of the condition device and an ON state is detected.
(A) Error processing The security signal output to the external terminal board 160 is turned on for 30 seconds.
Also, a vibration error occurrence designation command is transmitted to the effect control device 124.
(C) Error cancellation condition Condition The vibration detection sensor 1 signal from the vibration detection sensor 204 is monitored during operation of the apparatus. When an off state is detected, the error is canceled and a vibration error cancellation designation command is transmitted to the effect control device 124. .

[Starting port abnormal winning error]
Priority: 9
Notification LED on glass frame: Blue lighting Glass decoration LED: All lighting (full color: red lighting)
G-board decoration LED: All lights off Voice alert: “Start-up abnormal prize was detected”
LCD alert: An abnormal start-up winning was detected Error condition: When an abnormal start-up occurs (5 or more consecutive winnings at the same start-up)
Error release condition: 60 seconds after error occurrence External information: Output for 30 seconds Remarks: Not used for models that do not hold 8

[Door open error]
Priority: 10
Notification LED on glass frame: Blue lighting Glass decoration LED: All lighting (full color: red lighting)
G board decoration LED: All lights off Voice alert: Warning sound and “the door is open” (Always inform about 15 seconds after the door is opened)
LCD alarm: Door is open Error condition: When the door is open Error release condition: When the door is closed External information: Output when the door is open Remarks: After the door is closed, the door open error LED alarm pattern is maintained for 30 seconds

[Details of door opening error]
The door opening error includes an inner frame opening error and a glass frame opening error.
(1) Inner frame opening error (A) Error occurrence condition An inner frame opening signal from the plastic frame opening switch 93 is monitored, and an error occurs when the ON state continues for 100 ms.
(A) Error processing The inner frame opening error occurrence designation command is transmitted to the effect control device 124.
(C) Error release condition The inner frame release signal from the plastic frame release switch 93 is monitored. When the OFF state continues for 100 ms, the error is released and an inner frame release error release designation command is transmitted to the effect control device 124.
(2) Glass frame open error (a) Error occurrence condition An error occurs when the glass frame open signal from the glass frame open switch 91 is monitored and the ON state continues for 100 ms.
(A) Error processing A payout operation stop designation command is transmitted to the payout control device 92, and a glass frame opening error occurrence designation command is transmitted to the effect control device 124.
(C) Error release condition The glass frame release signal from the glass frame release switch 91 is monitored, and when the OFF state continues for 100 ms, the error is released and a dispensing operation start designation command is transmitted to the dispensing control device 92 to open the glass frame. An error release designation command is transmitted to the effect control device 124.

[Panel switch error]
Priority: 11
Notification LED on glass frame: Blue lighting Glass decoration LED: All lighting (full color: red lighting)
G board decoration LED: All lights off Voice alert: Warning sound and “Switch error”
LCD notification: Switch error Call an agent Error occurrence condition: When a panel proximity sensor error occurs Error release condition: When a panel proximity sensor error is released External information: Output during error detection Remarks: None

[Details of panel switch error]
(A) Error occurrence condition Panel switch (medium start winning port switch 80, right starting winning port switch 82, first count switch 84, second count switch 85, probability changing area switch 95a, discharge port switch 95b, first winning port switch 86, a switch abnormality signal from the second prize opening switch 81) is monitored, and an error occurs when the ON state continues for 100 ms.
(A) Error processing The security signal output to the external terminal board 160 is turned on.
Also, a panel switch error occurrence designation command is transmitted to the effect control device 124.
(C) Error clearing condition Switch error signal from the panel switch is monitored, and when the OFF state continues for 100 ms, the error is cleared, the security signal output to the external terminal board 160 is turned off, and the panel switch error canceling designation command is produced. It transmits to the control device 124.

[Moving body motor error]
Priority: 12
Notification LED on glass frame: Blue lighting Glass decoration LED: All lighting (full color: red lighting)
G board decoration LED: All lights off Voice alert: Warning sound and “Stage motor error”
LCD notification: Stage motor error Call an agent Error occurrence condition: When a main control movable body error occurs Error release condition: When a main control movable body error is released External information: Output during error detection Remarks: None

(Full tank error)
Priority: 13
Notification LED on glass frame: Blue lighting Glass frame decoration LED: As usual game G board decoration LED: As usual game Audio notification: “Pull out the ball” (can be voice depending on the model)
LCD notification: Pull out the ball Error occurrence condition: When full tank error occurs Error release condition: When full tank error is released External information: None Remarks: None

[Probability variation area non-passing error]
Priority: 14
Notification LED on glass frame: Blue lighting Glass decoration LED: All lighting (full color: green lighting)
G board decoration LED: As usual game Voice notification: None LCD notification: None Error condition: When a game ball passing to the probability change area is not detected during the long open round of the big winning opening with the probability change area Error release Condition: Until next device operation or power off External information: Output for 30 seconds Remarks: Not used for models not equipped with probability variation area

[Details of probability variation area non-passing error]
(A) Error occurrence condition The accessory continuous operation device is activated by the operation of the condition device according to the symbols other than 9 round symbol 1 (probability variation area long open symbol such as 9 round symbol 2 or 16 round symbol), and the probability variation region An error occurs when the probability variation area switch 95a does not detect a game ball when it is valid.
(A) Error processing The security signal output to the external terminal board 160 is turned on for 30 seconds.
In addition, a probability variation area non-passing error occurrence designation command is transmitted to the effect control device 124.
(C) Error canceling condition The main controller 70 cancels immediately after detecting an error (no processing is performed).

  In this way, in the probability variation area non-passing error, the main control device 70 “cancels immediately after the error is detected”, and the effect control device 124 continues to execute the error notification “until the next condition device is activated or the power is turned off”. . In addition, the power-off here means the main control device 70, and the error notification effect in the effect control device 124 is ended by the power-off. Note that “immediately cancel” means that the main control device 70 leaves the error control to the effect control device 124 without transmitting an error cancel command to the effect control device 124.

  By executing such processing, when it is determined that the probability variation region non-passing error state is detected, the main control device 70 elapses after a specified time (30 seconds) has elapsed since the probability variation region non-passing error state has occurred. A security signal indicating that an error state is occurring is transmitted to the external device (external terminal board, hall computer) until the main control device 70 produces a probability variation area non-passing error state to the effect control device 124. It is possible to transmit a probability variation area non-passing error occurrence designation command indicating that the high probability state transition area non-passing error state occurrence processing execution means.

  Further, by executing such processing, the main control device 70 can immediately cancel the probability variation region non-passing error state without performing special processing when a probability variation region non-passing error state occurs ( High probability state transition area non-passing error state cancellation processing execution means)

(Return from power interruption)
Priority: 15
Notification LED on glass frame: Blue lighting Glass decoration LED: Full lighting (full color: blue lighting)
G board decoration LED: All lights off Voice alert: None LCD alert: None (default screen display)
Error occurrence condition: When power is restored Error release condition: When movable body initial operation is completed External information: None Remarks: Initial movement time of movable body varies depending on the model

[Production movable body motor error]
Priority: 16
Notification LED on glass frame: When the error is generated in the movable body on the board (game board unit), it is lit in blue, and when the error is generated in the movable body in the frame, it is lit in green. If an error has occurred in the body, it will be lit in yellow. Glass frame decoration LED: as normal game G board decoration LED: as normal game Audio notification: None Liquid crystal notification: None Error condition: Sub-control movable body error occurred When error cancel condition: Until power off External information: None Remarks: None

[Details of error handling related to withdrawal]
FIG. 53 is a diagram for explaining the details of error processing contents relating to payout or the like.
The pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment executes error processing with the contents described in the figure by the main control device 70 or the effect control device 124. The contents of the described error processing may not be executed depending on the corresponding model. Also, the upper items in the figure are the same as the items in FIG. Hereinafter, the contents of each error will be specifically described in the order of priority.

[Clogged ball error]
Priority: 1
Notification LED on glass frame: Red lighting Glass decoration LED: As usual game G board decoration LED: As usual game Voice alert: None Liquid crystal alert: None Error occurrence condition: Discharge detection switch 107 is continuously ON detection Error release condition : Discharge detection switch 107 detects 50ms continuous off External information: None Remarks: None

[Discount counting switch error]
Priority: 2
Notification LED on glass frame: High-speed red flashing (100 ms cycle)
Glass frame decoration LED: as normal game G board decoration LED: as normal game Audio notification: None Liquid crystal notification: None Error occurrence condition: Discharge count switch error signal from payout count switch 106 is continuously detected for 300 ms Error release condition : The payout count switch error signal from the payout count switch 106 is off for 300 ms continuously. External information: None Remarks: None

[Error during withdrawal]
Priority: 3
Notification LED on glass frame: Slow red flashing (500 ms cycle)
Glass frame decoration LED: as normal game G board decoration LED: as normal game Audio notification: None Liquid crystal notification: None Error condition: When the number of payouts is insufficient after the payout operation, or a ball clogging error occurs during the payout operation. When a detection switch error occurs Error release condition: 20 seconds have passed and the payout detection switch signal is off, and the payout detection switch 107 detects one or more gaming balls when paying out again External information: None Remarks: Ball clogging error Or duplicate detection switch error

[Excessive ball error]
Priority: 4
Notification LED on glass frame: Low-speed alternating red-green flashing (500 ms cycle)
Glass frame decoration LED: as normal game G board decoration LED: as normal game Audio notification: None Liquid crystal notification: None Error condition: When excessive prize ball count reaches 10 (payout detection switch on edge when there is no payout) (Judge by the number of times)
Error release condition: When initial startup command is received When RAM is cleared External information: None Remarks: Error recovery is not canceled by power recovery start (power cycle without RAM clear) or power recovery start command

  As described above, in the error processing contents relating to fraud in FIGS. 49 to 52, the on-glass notification LED (two LED lamps 46b) is lit in blue, and in the error processing contents relating to payout in FIG. Since the notification LED (two LED lamps 46b) is lit and blinks in red or the like, it is possible to provide a lamp notification effect that is easy to understand at a glance what error type has occurred.

  Moreover, the priority in the case where the error processing contents related to fraud in FIGS. 49 to 52 and the error processing contents related to payout in FIG. 53 occur at the same time can be higher in the error processing contents related to payout. For this reason, even if the RAM clear error with the priority of error processing content relating to fraud etc. has occurred with the first priority, when the excessive prize ball error with the priority ranking of error processing content relating to payout of 4 occurs simultaneously, Error notification effects relating to excessive prize ball errors are preferentially executed.

  Such error processing is executed, for example, in the security control process (step S203a in FIG. 10), various error cancellation processes (step S112a in FIG. 7), and other processes on the main controller 70 side. On the side of the effect control device 124, the error effect management process (step S400a in FIG. 74) described later is executed.

[Game Flow]
FIG. 54 is a diagram for explaining a game flow that is developed when the game corresponds to “9 round symbol 1” or “9 round symbol 2” in the normal mode.
When a game is started with the pachinko machine 1, the game is started from [F1] normal mode. In the “normal mode”, the winning probability of the special symbol is “low probability state”, and the winning probability of the normal symbol is “low probability state”. In this way, since the [F1] normal mode is in the “low probability non-time shortened state”, the first special symbol starts to change and the game is started by entering the game ball into the middle start winning opening 26. Progress.

  [F1] In normal mode, when [F2] “9 round symbol 1” is a big win, [F3] 9 round big hit game (battle bonus) is executed, and [F4] is defeated in the battle of the big role [F5] Transition to the coast mode.

  [F5] The coast mode is a low probability time shortening state. [F5] In the coast mode, when the winning result is not obtained, [F6] When the special symbol fluctuates 100 times, [F1] shifts to the normal mode.

  [F1] In the normal mode, when [F7] “9 round symbol 2” big win is won, [F3] 9 round big hit game (battle bonus) is executed, and [F8] wins the battle of the big role effect.

  [F9] When the game ball passes the probability variation area in the seventh round of the 9th round jackpot game (when winning V), [F10] an effect indicating that a V winning has occurred is executed, and [F11] fireworks Move to rush.

  [F11] The fireworks rush is in a high probability time shortened state. [F11] If the result of winning is not obtained in the fireworks rush and [F12] special symbols fluctuate 170 times, [F1] shifts to the normal mode.

  On the other hand, if [F13] corresponds to the 9th round symbol 2, but the game ball does not pass the probability variation area in the seventh round of the big hit game (if V is not won), [F10] V win does not occur The effect which shows this is performed, and it transfers to [F5] coast mode.

  [F5] When the coast mode or [F11] fireworks rush hits a 16-round symbol jackpot, a 16-round jackpot game is executed. If the game ball passes the probability change area in the 7th to 9th rounds of the 16 round jackpot game, the game moves to [F11] fireworks rush, and the game balls in the 7th to 9th rounds of the 16 round jackpot game. Does not pass through the probability variation area, [F5] shifts to the coast mode.

[Game Flow]
FIG. 55 is a diagram for explaining a game flow developed when the fireworks rush or the coast mode corresponds to “16 round symbols” or “9 round symbols 2”.
[G5] 16 rounds big win game (special bonus) is executed when [G1] “16 round symbols” big win is won in [F5] coast mode or [F11] fireworks rush.

  [G3] When the game ball passes through the probability variation area in any of the seventh round to the ninth round of the 16 round big hit game (when winning V), [G4] an effect indicating that a V winning has occurred. Is executed, and after the jackpot game is over, [F11] fireworks rush is entered.

  On the other hand, although [G5] corresponds to the 16-round symbol, but the game ball does not pass through the probability variation area in any of the seventh to ninth rounds of the jackpot game (when the V prize is not won), [G6 ] An effect indicating that no V winning has occurred is executed, and after the big hit game ends, [F5] shifts to the coast mode.

  [G5] When the winning of [G10] “9 round symbol 2” is won in the coast mode or [F11] fireworks rush, [G11] 9 round winning game (normal bonus effect) is executed.

  [G12] When the game ball passes through the probability variation area in the seventh round of the ninth round jackpot game (when winning V), [G13] an effect indicating that a V winning has occurred is executed, and the jackpot game ends. Later, [F11] Fireworks Rush is entered.

On the other hand, although [G14] corresponds to the 9th round symbol 2 but the game ball does not pass the probability variation area in the seventh round of the big hit game (when V is not won), [G15] for example, the end of the ninth round After that, an effect indicating that no V winning has occurred is executed, and then, [F5] shifts to the coast mode.
Note that the above game flow shows an example of a typical game flow, and does not cover all of the game flow.

[Example of production image]
Next, the effect image actually displayed on the liquid crystal display 42 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described with some examples. As described above, when the big hit internal lottery is performed in the pachinko machine 1, the variation pattern (variation time) is determined under the control of the main control CPU 72, and the variation display by the first special symbol and the second special symbol is performed. (Design display means). However, as described above, the first special symbol and the second special symbol itself are lighted and blinked by 7-segment LEDs, so that they have poor appeal. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1, the variable display effect using the effect symbol is performed as described above.

  The effect designs include, for example, a left effect symbol, a middle effect symbol, and a right effect symbol, which are displayed side by side on the left, middle, and right on the screen of the liquid crystal display 42 (see FIG. 1). ). Each effect design is a design of a picture card with a character attached together with the numbers “1” to “9”, for example. Here, the left effect symbol, the middle effect symbol, and the right effect symbol all constitute a symbol row in which the numbers are arranged in descending order of “9” to “1”. Such a symbol sequence is variably displayed so as to flow (scroll) in the vertical direction in the left region, middle region, and right region on the screen.

  FIG. 56 is a continuous diagram showing an example of the effect image corresponding to the change display and stop display of the special symbol. Note that, here, an example of a change display effect and a stop display effect (result display effect) performed using the effect symbol is shown for the variation of the special symbol at the time of non-winning (losing). This variable display effect is performed between the start of the variable display of the special symbol (here, the first special symbol, but may be the second special symbol) and the stop display (including the fixed stop). It corresponds to a series of productions. Further, the stop display effect is an effect that represents that the special symbol is stopped and displayed and the result of the internal lottery at that time is a combination of the effect symbols. Here, before explaining the specific contents of the control processing, the basic flow of the change display effect and stop display effect for each change employed in the present embodiment will be described.

[Before change display]
56 (A): For example, in a state before the first special symbol starts to fluctuate (a state in which the demonstration effect is not being performed), a row of three effect symbols is displayed large on the screen of the liquid crystal display 42. ing. At this time, in accordance with the stop display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the effect symbol is also stopped.

  Further, in the pre-change display area X1 at the bottom of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42, markers (represented by reference numerals M1 and M2 in the figure) indicating the number of working memories of the first special symbol and the second special symbol are displayed. ing. Each of the markers M1 and M2 represents the number of operating memories of the first special symbol and the second special symbol (the number of displays of the first special symbol operating memory lamp 34a and the second special symbol operating memory lamp 35a). The number of displays increases or decreases in conjunction with the change in the number of operating memories during the game.

  In addition, for the markers M1 and M2, the marker M1 corresponding to the first special symbol is displayed as, for example, a circle (◯) in order to facilitate visual discrimination, and the marker M2 corresponding to the second special symbol is, for example, a heart It is displayed with the shape. In the example shown in the figure, all four markers M1 are lit and displayed, indicating that the number of working memories of the first special symbol is four, and all the markers M2 are not displayed (shown by broken lines). This indicates that the number of working memories of the second special symbol is 0 (stored image display effect).

  Further, during the variation display of the effect symbols, for example, the fourth symbol (reference numerals Z1 and Z2 are attached in the diagram) is displayed at the upper right of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42. The fourth symbols Z1 and Z2 are “fourth effect symbols” following the left, middle, and right effect symbols, and are displayed in a synchronized manner during the change display of the effect symbols. Note that the fourth symbols Z1 and Z2 are simple marks (for example, “□” figure) with colors, and for example, changing the display color can express a variable display. The fourth symbol Z1 corresponds to the first special symbol, and the fourth symbol Z2 corresponds to the second special symbol.

  Further, the fourth symbols Z1, Z2 are stopped and displayed in a mode (for example, white display color) corresponding to the dislocation. This is to objectively clarify that the stop display effect is correctly performed and the pachinko machine 1 is operating normally. Therefore, if the result of the internal lottery is “9 round big hit” or “16 round big hit” instead of “out of”, the 4th pattern is displayed in a manner corresponding to them (for example, blue display color or red display color). Z1 and Z2 are stopped and displayed.

[Variable display production start]
56 (B): For example, in synchronization with the start of the change of the first special symbol, the change display effect is started by the scroll change of the three symbol rows on the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42 (the symbol effect). Execution means). In other words, in synchronization with the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol, the display of the left effect symbol, the middle effect symbol, and the right effect symbol is scrolled (flowed) in the vertical direction on the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42 so as to change the display. Production begins. The markers M1 and M2 are displayed in the pre-fluctuation display area X1 of the band-like portion in the lower part of the liquid crystal display 42 before the start of change, but are displayed in the lower left part of the liquid crystal display 42 after the start of change. The display moves to the changing display area X2 based on the pedestal image, and continues to be displayed until the change of the special symbol (effect symbol) is stopped and displayed (stored image display maintenance effect). In the figure, the effect symbol variation display is simply indicated by a downward arrow. Also, during the variable display, each effect symbol is displayed in a transparent state (transparent display), and at this time, an image (background image) that is the background of the effect symbol is displayed on the display screen in an easily visible state. Has been.

  The background image in this case represents, for example, a landscape in which a female character wearing a yukata is sitting on a chaise lounge and relaxing as if the evening is cool. Such a background image expresses that the stay mode in the production is, for example, “normal mode”. In the present embodiment, the “normal mode” corresponds to a normal state in which the time reduction function is inactive and the probability variation function is inactive. In addition to this, various modes are provided for effects, and background images with different landscapes and scenes are prepared for each mode (status display effect execution means). The difference between these modes may correspond to an internal “time reduction state” or a “high probability state”. Although not specifically illustrated here, a mode in which a notice effect is performed by displaying an image of a character, an item, or the like on the display screen after that is also possible.

  Further, during the variation display of the effect symbols, the fourth symbol Z1 is variably displayed at the upper right of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42, and the fourth symbol Z1 expresses the variation display by changing its display color.

[Left design stop]
56 (C): For example, when a certain amount of time (about half of the fluctuation time) has elapsed, the left effect design first stops changing. In this example, the effect design representing the number “8” is stopped at the left position of the screen. Here, illustration of the background image is omitted (the same applies to the following).

[Example of production when the number of working memories decreases]
Here, as shown in (B) of FIG. 56, since the number of working memories of the first special symbol decreases by one as the fluctuation starts, the number of markers M1 displayed in conjunction with that decreases. It is reduced by one. For example, if there are four working memories so far, only the oldest (oldest) memory number display in the marker M1 is moved to the changing display area X2, and the effects consumed by the internal lottery are combined. Done. Thereby, it is possible to tell the player that the working memory number has been consumed for the first special symbol even in the production.

  In the example of (C) in FIG. 56, since the marker M1 at the top in the storage order moves to the changing display area X2, the display in the display area X1 before change becomes three. There is an effect in which the three markers M1 remaining on the screen are shifted in one direction (here, leftward) by one. As a result, the front-rear relationship of the change in the number of working memories is accurately expressed in the production, and the fact that the working memory is consumed and reduced by one for the player or that the working memory is consumed and the special symbol Can be taught intuitively and intelligibly.

[Right production symbol stop]
56 (D): Following the left effect symbol, the right effect symbol thereafter stops changing. In this example, the effect design representing the number “3” is stopped at the middle position of the screen. Since it has already been determined that the reach state does not occur at this point, it is almost clear on the appearance that the current fluctuation is a non-reach (normal) fluctuation. Here, reach fluctuations due to slip patterns and the like are excluded. “Slip pattern” means, for example, that once the design symbol representing the number “7” stops, the design symbol slips by one symbol and the design symbol representing the number “8” stops, thereby developing reach It is to do. Alternatively, once the design symbol representing the number “9” stops, the design symbol that represents the number “8” stops as the design sequence slips by one symbol in the opposite direction. is there. In addition, for example, when a production symbol representing a completely different number such as “5” is temporarily stopped and a character appears on the screen and the right production symbol row is changed again, the number “8” is represented. There is also a pattern in which the production design stops and develops to reach.

[Stop display effect]
56 (E): The last medium effect symbol stops in synchronization with the stop display of the first special symbol. If the result of the current internal lottery is non-winning and the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a non-winning (out-of-game) manner, the staging display effect is also performed in a non-winning (out-of-game) manner. Is called. That is, in the illustrated example, the effect symbol representing the number “1” is stopped at the middle position of the screen. In this case, the combination of the effect symbols is “8”-“1”-“3”. Since this is a gap, it is expressed in the production that the current variation corresponds to the normal “out of range”. At this time, the fourth symbol Z1 is stopped and displayed in a mode (for example, white display color) corresponding to the dislocation.

  Further, when the stop display effect is performed, the marker M1 that has been moved to the changing display area X2 and has been continuously displayed is also hidden. Therefore, it can be intuitively and easily instructed to the player that “the variation of the special symbol has ended”.

  The above is an example of the change display effect and the stop display effect (during non-winning) performed using the effect symbol for each change. Through such an effect, the player can have a sense of expectation for winning, and finally the result of the internal lottery can be clearly taught in the effect.

  In addition, the above example is for the case of non-winning, but at the time of big win (winning), after the reach effect is executed during the variable display effect, the effect symbol is stopped and displayed in a big win mode in the stop display effect. At this time, the stop display mode of the effect symbol basically corresponds to the winning symbol (stop display mode of the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35) selected internally by the main control CPU 72. Selected.

[Production example at the time of big hit]
FIG. 57 shows a reach effect (super reach effect) executed at the time of a big hit (winning) in the case of “9 round symbol 1”, “9 round symbol 2” or “16 round symbol” in the non-time shortened state. It is a continuous figure which shows a flow. Here, in addition to the reach effect, a variable display effect, a stop display effect, and a notice effect are included. In addition, an example of the notice effect (the notice effect before the occurrence of reach, the notice effect after the occurrence of reach) executed during the variable display effect will be described.

  The following reach effects are, for example, after the first special symbol display device 34 performs a variation display by the variation pattern at the time of the big hit, the first special symbol is “9 round symbol 1” or “9 round symbol 2” ( For example, it is executed until the 7 segment LED is stopped and displayed at “self”, “yo”, “mouth”, “巳”, “F”, “E”, “L”, “Γ”, etc.) (reach) Production execution means). In addition, in FIG. 57, each effect design is simplified and shown only as a number. The markers M1 and M2 and the fourth symbols Z1 and Z2 are not shown here. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along the flow of production.

[Variable display effects]
In FIG. 57 (A): For example, the columns of the left effect symbol, the middle effect symbol, and the right effect symbol are arranged in the vertical direction (for example, from the top) on the screen of the liquid crystal display 42 substantially in synchronization with the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol. The variable display effect is started by scrolling down.

[Preliminary production before reach (first stage)]
FIG. 57B: Next, in a relatively early stage of the variable display effect, the first stage pre-reach notice effect using the character's picture image (picture card) is performed. This pre-reach pre-announcement effect is a pre-announcement effect in which the change of the mode progresses in stages from one stage to a plurality of stages (for example, 2 to 5 stages) according to a predetermined order. The pattern image used in the pre-reach notice effect is located in front of the effect pattern that is displayed on the screen in a variable manner, for example, so as to appear suddenly from the left edge of the screen (other appearance modes) May be.) Note that the “pre-reach notice” means that a reach or a big hit is announced before any effect symbol is stopped and displayed. By executing such a “pre-reach announcement effect”, an effect of giving the player a sense of expectation that “it may develop into a reach = the possibility of a big hit increases” is obtained.

[Advance notice before the reach occurs (second stage)]
In FIG. 57 (C): after the first stage of the pre-reach notice effect is executed, the change of the pre-reach notice effect proceeds to the second stage. Here, an effect using a character pattern image different from the previous one is performed as the notice effect before the occurrence of reach in the second stage. Specifically, another pattern image additionally appears from the right end of the screen, and is displayed so as to overlap the front of the previously displayed pattern image. The picture image displayed at this time is larger in size than the picture image displayed previously. And the effect by the sound output that the character expressed by the picture image emits a dialogue (for example, “I will reach” etc.) is also performed.

  Such a pre-reach notice effect (second stage) using the second pattern image is one step further than the pre-reach notice effect (first stage) performed in FIG. 57 (B). It is a development type. In general, it may be expressed as “step-up notice” or the like, referring to the “pre-reach notice notice effect” that develops in this way. Here, an example is given in which the second-stage pattern image appears in the pre-reach notice effect, but the third-stage, fourth-stage, and fifth-stage pattern images appear and appear one after another. There may be. Further, for example, the size may be enlarged each time the third, fourth, and fifth-stage pattern images appear and appear one after another. Even at this stage, the variation display of the effect symbols is continued. In any case, it is possible to indicate to the player that there is a high possibility (expectation) that this change will be a big hit by making the change in the aspect of the pre-reach notice effect to more stages. (For example, the maximum expectation is suggested when progressing to the fifth stage).

[Stop of left design]
In FIG. 57 (D): The middle stage of the variable display effect is approached, and the variable display of the left effect symbol is eventually stopped. At this point, the effect symbol representing the number “5” is stopped at the left position of the screen.

[Generation of reach condition]
In FIG. 57 (E): Subsequently to the left effect symbol, for example, the change display of the right effect symbol is stopped. At this point, the effect symbol representing the number “5” is stopped at the right position of the screen, so that a reach state of “5”-“being changed”-“5” has occurred. On the screen, an image that emphasizes one line that is in a reach state is also displayed. In addition, an effect of outputting a voice such as “Reach!” Is performed. Furthermore, in this case, if the number “5” is aligned, the expectation level of the big hit in “9 round symbol 2” will be high, so not only the success or failure of the lottery, but also “ Players can have a variety of tensions.

  After the reach state occurs, the reach production at the time of winning is executed (however, at this point in time, the winning result has not yet been expressed). In the reach effect, only the effect symbol corresponding to the tempered number (here, “5”) is displayed on the screen, and the others are not displayed. At this time, the effect symbols may be displayed in a reduced state at the four corners of the screen.

[Preliminary notice after reach occurs (first time)]
In FIG. 57, (F): After a reach state has occurred, for example, an image representing a “heart” figure forms a group and passes through the screen diagonally. . In this case, the image of the “heart group” is suddenly displayed on the screen so that the visual appeal to the player can be enhanced. By executing such a notice presentation effect after the visually lively reach notice occurrence, an effect of giving the player a greater expectation can be obtained.

[Progress of reach production]
In FIG. 57 (G): Following the notice effect after the first reach, for example, images representing the numbers “2” to “6” are displayed in a three-dimensional column on the screen. There is an effect in which numerical images are erased from the screen in the order of “2”, “3”, “4”. Such an effect is also performed for the purpose of suggesting (impliciting) or reminding the player that the number “5” is left as it is without being erased. If the number “4” is erased and “5” remains in front of the screen, it means “big hit”, and if the number “5” is also erased, it means “out of place”. In the case of a loss, for example, the number “6” is displayed on the screen after the number “5” is deleted. Therefore, during this time, as the images are erased in order of the numbers “2”, “3”, and “4”, the player's tension and expectation also increase. Then, if the production progresses with the number “4” actually being erased on the screen and the number “5” remaining on the screen, the possibility of a “hit” increases, so the player feels nervous. Also increases at a stretch.

[Preliminary notice after the occurrence of reach (second time)]
In FIG. 57 (H): When the reach production is approaching the final stage, the image of the character is suddenly displayed on the screen as if it was split into a large copy, and the content that the character emits some dialogue (or silently) (The content may be that of smiling). At this time, for example, the content of the reach effect is a development that “if the number“ 5 ”remains without being erased, the possibility of a big hit of“ 5 ”-“ 5 ”-“ 5 ”increases” as it is ”. Therefore, by causing a character image to appear greatly at this timing, an effect of giving the player a sense of expectation that “may be a big hit” is obtained.

  As another reach effect different from the above, for example, there is a development that “numbers“ 2 ”to“ 4 ”are erased, and if the number“ 5 ”is left unerased at the end, it is a big hit” ”. When the character image appears at such a timing, an effect of giving the player a sense of expectation that “the jackpot may be close soon” can be obtained.

[Stop display effect]
In FIG. 57 (I): For example, the last medium effect symbol stops substantially in synchronization with the stop display of the first special symbol. In this example, the winning symbol internally corresponds to either “9 round symbol 1” or “9 round symbol 2”. However, for example, “5” ”Is displayed in the center of the screen so that the player is informed that the game has fallen into“ 9 round symbol 1 ”or“ 9 round symbol 2 ”this time. .

  In FIG. 57 (J): For example, a stop display effect as an effect symbol is performed substantially in synchronization with the stop display of the first special symbol. The stop display effect of the effect symbol is performed, for example, in a state where the left, middle and right effect symbols are restored to their initial sizes. By performing such a stop display effect, the player can be informed that the final winning type has been confirmed on the effect. In other words, by making an unclear stop display effect on the effect, it is not disclosed to the player that “I won in 9 round symbol 1 or 9 round symbol 2” I can leave.

  In addition, when it corresponds to "9 round symbol 2", the following production techniques can be adopted. In other words, when “9 round symbol 2” corresponds internally, an even number of effect symbols are stopped and displayed for a while, and an effect symbol of “7” is stopped and displayed by re-variation (for example, a re-lottery effect). It is possible to execute an effect that clearly teaches that it corresponds to “9 round symbol 2”.

  Further, if the result of the internal lottery is not won, the first special symbol that is the current variation target is stopped and displayed as the off symbol, so that the staging display effect is similarly performed in a manner of deviation. In this case, by displaying the numbers “4” and “6” other than “5” in the center of the screen, unfortunately, an effect is provided informing that the current change did not result in a big hit. Such an effect is executed as an “out of reach reach effect”.

[Examples of production during a major role in the case of “9 round symbols 1”, etc.]
FIGS. 58 to 61 are continuous diagrams partially showing an example of the effect of the prominent performance when it corresponds to “9 round symbol 1” or “9 round symbol 2” in the normal mode.

  In this embodiment, when it corresponds to “9 round symbol 1”, the effect that the ally character is defeated by the enemy character is executed in the big role effect, and when it corresponds to “9 round symbol 2”, the friend An effect in which the character wins the enemy character is executed. Hereinafter, the flow of production will be described in order.

[Round 1]
58 (A): When the first round of the big hit game is started, for example, character information corresponding to the number of rounds of “ROUND1” is displayed on the screen, and the battle effect of the big game is started. In the example shown in the figure, a ghost image of an umbrella that is an enemy character is displayed on the left side of the screen, a female character image that is an ally character is displayed on the right side of the screen, and an image of the character “VS” is displayed in the center of the screen. Is displayed. Thereby, it can be taught to the player that a battle effect will be started.

  In addition, an effect symbol corresponding to the current winning symbol (here, “5” effect symbol) is displayed at the lower right corner of the screen. Thus, by continuously displaying the winning symbol (so-called “remaining eye”) even during the big hit game, it is possible to continuously instruct the player of the information “winning with the five effect symbols”. In the second round of the big hit game, the same effect as the first round is executed.

[3rd round]
(B) in FIG. 58: When the third round of the big hit game is started, the battle effect in the big role is specifically advanced. In the example shown in the figure, an effect is given in which the ghost of the umbrella moves from the left side to the right side. Then, the female character is surprised to run away from the ghost of the umbrella and escapes to the right side of the screen.

[Round 4]
In FIG. 58 (C): When the fourth round of the big hit game is started, the battle effect in the big role is specifically advanced. In the example shown in the figure, a female character takes out a round fan (weapon), and an effect is shown in which a flame (aura) appears.

[5th round]
In FIG. 58 (D): In the fifth round of the jackpot game, the ghost of the umbrella gives out a special technique that makes the long tongue pop out of the mouth, and the female character greets the special technique with a fan. If the ghost of the umbrella wins in this state, it means that it was a big hit with "9 round symbol 1", and if the female character wins, it means that it was a big hit with "9 round symbol 2" Yes.

[6th round (9 rounds when winning 1 symbol)]
In FIG. 59 (E): In the case of winning in the 9th round symbol 1, a defeat effect is executed in the sixth round. Specifically, an umbrella ghost is displayed with a letter “defeat ...”, and a female character is displayed smaller (a teammate character defeat production).
In addition, in the sixth round in the case of winning in the 9th round symbol 1, the first variable winning device 30 is opened four times, but since the opening time is set extremely short, almost no profit is gained by playing. .

[7th round (when 9 symbols are selected for 9th round)]
In FIG. 59, (F): In the case of winning in the 9th round symbol 1, a re-challenge promotion effect is executed in the seventh round. Specifically, an effect is produced in which a female character utters a line such as “Next is not defeated!”. As a result, the player can be motivated to aim for the big hit again. In the eighth and ninth rounds of the jackpot game, a re-challenge promotion effect similar to the seventh round is executed. In addition, from the 7th to the 9th round when winning in the 9th round symbol 1, the second variable winning device 31 is opened once, but the opening time is set to be extremely short, so the profit from the game Can hardly be obtained. Further, even if a game ball enters the second variable winning device 31, the game ball does not pass through the probability variation area.

[At the end of a major role]
In FIG. 59 (G): At the timing when the big hit game in the 9-round symbol 1 ends (during end processing), the big end ending effect of the content teaching the internal state to be transferred thereafter is executed. In the example shown in the figure, text information “Coast mode entry!” Is displayed on the screen. By executing such a big game end effect, the player can be instructed to shift to the “low probability time shortened state” coast mode as a privilege after the big hit game ends.

[6th round (9 rounds when winning 2 symbols)]
In FIG. 60 (H): On the other hand, in the case of winning in the 9-round symbol 2, a victory effect is executed in the sixth round. Specifically, the female character is displayed larger with the letters “Victory !!”, and the ghost of the umbrella is displayed smaller (Allied character victory effect).
In addition, in the sixth round when winning in the 9 round symbol 2, the first variable winning device 30 is opened four times, but since the opening time is set to be extremely short, there is almost no profit due to the game. .

[7th round (9 rounds when winning 2 symbols)]
In FIG. 60 (I): In the case of winning in the 9th round symbol 2, a fireworks rush challenge effect is executed in the seventh round. If this challenge is successful, you will enter a fireworks rush that is in a “high probability time reduction state”. Specifically, an effect is produced in which the hermit character utters a line such as “Aim at V Attacker!”. Thereby, the game nature of aiming at the second variable winning device 31 can be transmitted to the player. In addition, in the 7th round when winning in the 9 round symbol 2, the second variable winning device 31 is opened once and the opening time is set long (29 seconds). Profits from launching can be obtained. Further, since the probability variation area solenoid 99 is activated in the seventh round when winning the 9th round symbol 2, when the game ball enters the second variable prize winning device 31, the game ball becomes the probability variation area blade member 31 d. To pass through the probability variation area.

  In FIG. 60 (J): When the player continues to make a right strike, when the game ball enters the second variable winning device 31 and passes through the probability variation area, the panda character raises the V mark. Is executed. In the eighth and ninth rounds of the big hit game, the same blessing effect as the seventh round is executed. However, in the 8th and 9th rounds when winning in the 9th round symbol 2, the second variable prize-winning device 31 is released once, but the opening time is set to be extremely short, so the profit from the game Can hardly be obtained. In the eighth and ninth rounds, even if a game ball enters the second variable winning device 31, the game ball does not pass through the probability variation area.

[At the end of a major role]
In FIG. 60 (K): At the timing when the big hit game is ended (during the end process), the big end effect of the content teaching the internal state to be transferred thereafter is executed. In the example shown in the figure, character information “Fireworks rush rush!” Is displayed on the screen. By executing such a big game end effect, the player can be instructed to shift to the fireworks rush in the “high probability time shortened state” as a privilege after the big hit game ends.

  The above is an example of an effect when the game ball passes the probability variation area safely corresponding to “9 round symbol 2”, but the game ball passes the probability variation region even if it corresponds to “9 round symbol 2”. If it does not, it will be the following production example.

[6th round (9 rounds when winning 2 symbols)]
In FIG. 61 (L): In the case of winning in the 9th round symbol 2, a victory effect is executed in the sixth round. Specifically, the female character is displayed larger with the letters “Victory !!”, and the ghost of the umbrella is displayed smaller (Allied character victory effect).

[7th round (9 rounds when winning 2 symbols)]
In FIG. 61, (M): In the case of winning in the 9th round symbol 2, a fireworks rush challenge effect is executed in the seventh round. If this challenge is successful, you will enter a fireworks rush that is in a “high probability time reduction state”. Specifically, an effect is produced in which the hermit character utters a line such as “Aim at V Attacker!”. Thereby, the game nature of aiming at the second variable winning device 31 can be transmitted to the player. In addition, in the 7th round when winning in the 9 round symbol 2, the second variable winning device 31 is opened once and the opening time is set long (29 seconds). Profits from launching can be obtained. Further, since the probability variation area solenoid 99 is activated in the seventh round when winning the 9th round symbol 2, when the game ball enters the second variable prize winning device 31, the game ball becomes the probability variation area blade member 31 d. To pass through the probability variation area.

  However, here, it is assumed that no game ball has entered the second variable winning device 31 by the end of the seventh round for some reason (not hitting right, clogged with a ball, etc.). In this case, the game ball does not pass through the probability variation area.

[8th round (9 rounds when winning 2 symbols)]
In FIG. 61, (N): In this case, a failure effect is produced in which the panda character utters the word “sorry”. Note that the same failure effect as in the eighth round is executed in the ninth round of the jackpot game. In addition, in the 8th and 9th rounds when winning in the 9th round symbol 2, the second variable winning device 31 is released once, but the opening time is set to be extremely short. Can hardly be obtained. In the eighth and ninth rounds, even if a game ball enters the second variable winning device 31, the game ball does not pass through the probability variation area. At this time, an error effect indicating that a probability variation area non-passing error has occurred can be executed together.

[At the end of a major role]
In FIG. 61 (O): At the timing when the big hit game in the 9-round symbol 2 ends (during end processing), the big end effect of the content teaching the internal state to be transferred thereafter is executed. In the example shown in the figure, text information “Coast mode entry!” Is displayed on the screen. By executing such a big game end effect, the player can be instructed to shift to the “low probability time shortened state” coast mode as a privilege after the big hit game ends.

[Examples of fireworks rush production]
FIG. 62 is a continuous diagram showing an example of the effect of fireworks rush. This fireworks rush corresponds to a big hit of “9 round symbol 2” or “16 round symbol”, and is a mode that is shifted after the big hit game when the game ball passes through the probability variation area during the big hit game. The fireworks rush is a state of high probability time reduction, and is a chance zone that continues until the special symbol fluctuates 170 times after the big hit game. Hereinafter, the flow of production will be described in order.

  62 (A): For example, by performing the first variation display after the end of the big hit game, the variation display of the effect symbol is performed in the “fireworks rush” state. In order to deeply impress the player with the fireworks motif, the background image of the fireworks rush is a background image that expresses "a scene where fireworks are launched in the night sky" and "a female character watching fireworks" It has become. Further, the fourth symbol Z2 is variably displayed in the upper right part of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42.

  In FIG. 62 (B): Since the first change (when not winning) after the end of the big hit game, all effect symbols are stopped and displayed ("3"-"1"-"7 "). Further, the fourth symbol Z2 is stopped and displayed in a non-winning manner (for example, white display color).

  (C) in FIG. 62: When the next fluctuation is started, the second fluctuation display is performed after the big hit game ends. In the fireworks rush (high probability time shortened state), the variable start winning device 28 is frequently operated. Therefore, as long as the player continues to make a right stroke, the effect symbol accompanying the variable display of the second special symbol is displayed. Fluctuation display is often performed.

FIG. 63 to FIG. 66 are continuous diagrams showing examples of effects executed when winning or losing in the fireworks rush.
The following effect examples are effect examples that are executed when the fireworks rush corresponds to a big hit of “16 round symbols” or when the outlier reach effect is selected. Hereinafter, the flow of production will be described in order.

  In FIG. 63, (A): In the state of “fireworks rush”, the change display of the effect symbol is performed. In the example shown in the drawing, a background image expressing “a scene where a female character is watching fireworks” is displayed together with “a scene where fireworks are launched in the night sky”. In addition, a fourth symbol Z1 corresponding to the first special symbol and a fourth symbol Z2 corresponding to the second special symbol are displayed on the upper right of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42. Here, the fourth symbol Z2 varies. It is displayed.

  In FIG. 63 (B): After a while from the start of the change, an effect is produced in which the female character as a teammate character emits the line “game!”. By executing such an effect, it is possible to give the player an impression that “something will begin in the future”. From this point of time, in order to display the reach effect on the entire screen, the effect display effect is executed in a state where the effect symbol is reduced at the upper left corner position of the screen ("2"-"Fluctuating"-"Fluctuating" During").

  In FIG. 63 (C): For example, a panda character (enemy character) appears on the left side of the screen, a female character (friend character) appears on the right side of the screen, and an image of the character “VS” appears in the center of the screen. Production to be performed. Thereby, it can be taught to the player that a battle reach effect will be started. It should be noted that a reach state has occurred in the effect symbol that is variably displayed at the upper left of the screen ("2"-"fluctuating"-"2").

  In FIG. 64 (D): After that, the battle reach effect is specifically advanced. In the example shown in the figure, an effect is performed in which the panda character moves toward the female character. Then, there will be a performance in which the female character runs away with surprise and disappears to the right side of the screen.

  In FIG. 64 (E): This time, the female character performs a deadly stance, and an effect in which a flame (aura) appears from the female character's body is performed. At this point, the expectation of the big hit can be changed by changing the color and size of the flame.

  (F) in FIG. 64: Then, the female character and the panda character confront each other, and an effect that the female character arranges the posture is executed.

  In FIG. 65 (G): Subsequently, an effect is produced in which a shock wave is emitted from the palm of the female character. If you can defeat the panda character in this state, you win.

[When disconnected]
In FIG. 65 (H): When the variation of the special symbol this time corresponds to non-winning, an effect in which a panda character repels a shock wave using a shield is executed.

  In FIG. 65, (I): A panda character is displayed in a large size together with a character “defeated ..” and a female character is displayed in a small size. Then, at the upper left corner position of the screen, the effect symbol is stopped and displayed in a state where the effect symbol is reduced ("2"-"3"-"2").

  65 (J): In this case, a stop display effect as an effect symbol is performed in synchronization with the special symbol stop display. The stop display effect of the effect symbol is performed, for example, in a state where the left, middle and right effect symbols are restored to their initial sizes. Further, the fourth symbol Z2 is stopped and displayed in a non-winning manner (for example, white display color).

  After this, since the fireworks rush continues, the player will aim for the next big hit during the fireworks rush.

[When winning]
In FIG. 65 (K): On the other hand, when the variation of the special symbol corresponds to “16 rounds big hit” or “9 rounds big hit 2”, a shock wave hits the panda character, which causes an explosion and causes a panda. An effect is performed in which the character of is thrown away.

  In FIG. 65, (L): When the female character is displayed large together with the characters “Victory!” And the panda character is displayed small, it is transmitted to the player that it is a big hit (winning). At the upper left corner of the screen, the stop display effect is executed with the effect symbol reduced (“2”-“2”-“2”). However, all of the three production symbols are displayed swinging from side to side, and the variation of the production symbols is not completely stopped.

  FIG. 65 (M): The effect symbols are returned to the state where the left, middle, and right effect symbols are restored to their initial sizes. However, all of the three production symbols are displayed swinging from side to side, and the variation of the production symbols is not completely stopped. At this time, the special symbol is in a changing state, and the fourth symbol Z2 is also in a changing state.

[Promotion promotion]
In FIG. 66 (N): If there are three production symbols during the change of the second special symbol, it is determined that it is easy to pass through the probability variation area during the big hit and the big hit, but in the big hit game Promotional effects that affect the magnitude of the profit (outgoing ball) obtained in this way are executed. In the example shown in the drawing, the character information “promotion chance” is displayed on the upper part of the screen. Thereby, the promotion effect is started from now on, and a sense of expectation that “2 effect design” may be changed to “7 effect design” can be given.

  In FIG. 66, (O): The effect pattern in which the three lined effect symbols are gradually displayed in a small size, and the effect in which the three lined effect symbols are sucked into the back side of the screen while rotating is executed.

  In FIG. 66 (P): The three effect symbols become so small that they cannot be visually recognized. At that time, the image of the effect switch button 45 is displayed at the bottom of the display screen, and the player presses the press of the effect switch button 45. An effect is urged.

[Promotion failure promotion]
In FIG. 66, (Q): When it is a 9-round big hit (for example, “9-round symbol 2”), the promotion failure effect is executed. In this case, when the effect switching button 45 is pressed, an effect that the effect symbol pops out from the back side to the near side is executed, and the effect symbol is enlarged and displayed so that not all of the three effect symbols can be displayed. “2 effect design” is displayed without change.

  In FIG. 66, (R): The stop display effect is also performed for the effect symbol substantially in synchronization with the stop display of the second special symbol. The stop display effect of the effect symbol is performed in a state where the effect symbol is completely stopped without shaking. In addition, the fourth symbol Z2 is actually stopped and displayed in a mode (for example, green display color) corresponding to the 9 round big hit (for example, “9 round symbol 2”). After this, a big hit effect (normal bonus effect) corresponding to the ninth round big hit is executed.

[Promotion of successful promotion]
In FIG. 66 (S): On the other hand, in the case of 16-round big hit (“16-round symbol”), the promotion success effect is executed. In this case, the effect that the movable body 40f falls is triggered by the pressing of the effect switching button 45.

  In FIG. 66 (T): The stop display effect is also performed for the effect symbol substantially in synchronization with the stop display of the second special symbol. In this case, the effect symbol is changed from “2 effect symbol” to “7 effect symbol” and displayed. The stop display effect of the effect symbol is performed in a state where the effect symbol is completely stopped without shaking. Further, the fourth symbol Z2 is actually stopped and displayed in a mode (for example, orange display color) corresponding to the 16 round big hit (“16 round symbol”). After this, a big hit effect (special bonus effect) corresponding to the 16 round big hit is executed.

[Director-in-chief production (normal bonus production)]
FIG. 67 is a continuous diagram partially showing an example of a big-bill effect performed during a big hit game when the fireworks rush or coast mode corresponds to “9 round symbol 2”.

[1 round]
67 (A): When the first round of the big hit game is started, the big role effect of the content corresponding to the progress status of the game, “big hit” is executed. In the role-playing effect, for example, character information corresponding to the number of rounds “ROUND1” is displayed on the screen. In addition, at the lower right corner position of the screen, an effect symbol corresponding to the current winning symbol (here, two effect symbols) is displayed. In this way, by continuously displaying the winning symbol (so-called “remaining eye”) even during the big hit game, it is possible to continuously instruct the player of the information “winning with the two effect symbols”. In addition, characters “normal bonus” are displayed in the lower area of the display screen, and images related to festivals such as fan fans and drums are displayed around the screen.

[7 rounds]
67 (B): In the case of winning in “9 round symbol 2”, the fireworks rush challenge effect is executed in the seventh round. If this challenge production is successful, you will enter the fireworks rush, which is a state of high probability reduction. Specifically, an effect is produced in which a female character utters a line such as “Aim for V Attacker”. Thereby, the game nature of aiming at the second variable winning device 31 can be transmitted to the player. In addition, in the seventh round when winning with “9 round symbol 2”, the second variable winning device 31 is opened once and the opening time is set long (29 seconds). In the same way, you can get a profit from the game. Further, since the probability variation area solenoid 99 is activated in the seventh round when winning the 16-round symbol, when the game ball enters the second variable prize-winning device 31, the game ball enters the probability variation area blade member 31d. Guided through the probability variation area.

  In FIG. 67 (C): When the player continues to make a right strike and the game ball enters the second variable winning device 31 and passes through the probability variation area, a V mark is displayed on the upper right of the display screen. Blessing production is performed. In the eighth and ninth rounds of the big hit game, the same blessing effect as the seventh round is executed. However, in the 8th and 9th rounds when winning in “9 round symbol 2”, the second variable winning device 31 is released once, but the opening time is set to be extremely short. The profit by is hardly obtained. In the eighth and ninth rounds, even if a game ball enters the second variable winning device 31, the game ball does not pass through the probability variation area.

[At the end of a major role]
In FIG. 67 (D): At the timing when the big hit game is finished, the big end ending effect of the content teaching the internal state to be transferred thereafter is executed. In the example shown in the figure, character information “Fireworks rush rush!” Is displayed on the screen. By executing such a big game end effect, the player can be instructed to shift to the fireworks rush in the “high probability time shortened state” as a privilege after the big hit game ends.

[Director-in-chief production (special bonus production)]
FIG. 68 is a continuous diagram partially showing an example of a big-game effect performed during a jackpot game when the fireworks rush or coast mode corresponds to “16 round symbols”.

[1 round]
In FIG. 68 (A): When the first round of the jackpot game is started, the big-game effect of the content corresponding to the progress of the game, “Big hit” is executed. In the role-playing effect, for example, character information corresponding to the number of rounds “ROUND1” is displayed on the screen. In addition, an effect symbol corresponding to the current winning symbol (here, seven effect symbols) is displayed at the lower right corner position of the screen. Thus, by continuously displaying the winning symbol (so-called “remaining eye”) even during the big hit game, it is possible to continuously instruct the player of the information “winning with the seven effect symbols”. In addition, a character “special bonus” is displayed in the lower area of the display screen, and an image of a female character performing a peace sign across a horse is displayed around the screen.

[7 rounds]
In FIG. 68, (B): In the case of winning with a 16-round symbol, a fireworks rush challenge effect is executed in the seventh to ninth rounds. If this challenge production is successful, you will enter the fireworks rush, which is a state of high probability reduction. Specifically, an effect is produced in which the hermit character utters a line such as “Aim at V Attacker!”. Thereby, the game nature of aiming at the second variable winning device 31 can be transmitted to the player. In addition, in the 7th to 9th rounds when winning with a 16-round symbol, the second variable winning device 31 is released once, but since the opening time is set long (29 seconds), so far As with the round, you can get a profit from the game. Further, since the probability variation area solenoid 99 is operated in the seventh to ninth rounds when winning the 16-round symbol, when the game ball enters the second variable winning device 31, the game ball is used for the probability variation area. It is guided by the blade member 31d and passes through the probability variation region.

  In FIG. 68 (C): When the player continues to make a right strike and the game ball enters the second variable winning device 31 and passes through the probability variation area, a V mark is displayed next to the female character that has jumped up. The displayed blessing effect is executed. In the eighth and ninth rounds of the big hit game, the same blessing effect as the seventh round is executed. In addition, in the 8th and 9th rounds when winning with a 16-round symbol, the second variable winning device 31 is released once, but the opening time is set as long (29 seconds) as in the 7th round. Therefore, as with previous rounds, profits can be gained by playing. In addition, when the 16-round symbol is won, the probability variation area solenoid 99 is also activated for the 8th and 9th rounds. Therefore, when the game ball enters the second variable prize winning device 31, the game ball is surely changed. It is guided by the region blade member 31d and passes through the probability variation region. However, the probability variation area only needs to pass the game ball even once during the big hit game, and if the game ball has already passed the probability variation area in the seventh round, the subsequent passage is not particularly meaningful.

[16 rounds]
In FIG. 68 (D): After this, the jackpot game proceeds smoothly, and when the final 16 rounds are reached, the character information corresponding to the number of rounds of “ROUND16” is displayed on the screen and the jackpot game is being played. A unique effect image is displayed. Further, the effect symbol (7 effect symbol) as the above-mentioned “left eye” is continuously displayed at the lower right corner position of the screen.

[At the end of a major role]
In FIG. 68 (E): At the timing when the big hit game is finished, the big end finish effect of the content teaching the internal state to be transferred thereafter is executed. In the example shown in the figure, character information “Fireworks rush rush!” Is displayed on the screen. By executing such a big game end effect, the player can be instructed to shift to the fireworks rush in the “high probability time shortened state” as a privilege after the big hit game ends.

[Example of coast mode production]
FIG. 69 is a continuous diagram illustrating an example of the coast mode effect. In this coast mode, the game ball passes through the probability change area after the jackpot game when “9 round symbol 1” is met or during the jackpot game of “9 round symbol 2” or “16 round symbol” In this case, the mode is shifted to after the end of the big hit game. The coast mode is a “low probability time reduction state”. Hereinafter, the flow of production will be described in order.

  69 (A): For example, after the big hit game in “9 round symbol 1” is finished, the first variation display is performed, so that the effect symbol variation display is performed in the “coast mode” state. Yes. The background image of the coast mode is a background image with motifs of images such as “sand beach”, “sea”, and “mountain” in order to express the healing impression that is the concept of the coast mode. Further, the fourth symbol Z2 is variably displayed at the upper right of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42.

  In FIG. 69 (B): Since the current change (during non-winning) has been completed, all effect symbols are stopped and displayed ("1"-"1"-"5"). Further, the fourth symbol Z2 is stopped and displayed in a non-winning manner (for example, white display color).

  In FIG. 69 (C): The next variation is started. This coast mode ends when the special symbol changes 100 times without obtaining a winning result. When the coast mode ends, the mode shifts to the normal mode with a low probability non-time reduction state. If a winning result is obtained in the coast mode, a reach effect is executed and a big hit is achieved.

FIG. 70 is a diagram showing an example of an effect production that is executed when a big prize entry / out of ball mismatch error occurs.
When a big prize entrance entrance / exit inconsistency error occurs, the error notification LED on the glass frame (two LED lamps 46b) lights in blue, and the other glass frame decoration LEDs (the six LED lamps of the glass frame top lamp 46). 46 a, nine LED lamps 48 a to 48 g of the left glass frame decoration lamp 48, nine LED lamps 50 a to 50 g of the right glass frame decoration lamp 50, and 19 LED lamps 52 a of the left and right glass frame decoration lamps 52 ˜52s) is lit red.

The speakers 54 and 55 output a sound “An incoming / outgoing ball mismatch error has been detected”, and the speaker 56 outputs a warning sound.
Further, on the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42, the character information “Incoming / outgoing ball mismatch detected, please call a staff member” is displayed.
The G board decoration LED (board lamp 53) is turned off.

FIG. 71 is a diagram showing an example of an effect production that is executed when a special winning opening abnormal discharge error occurs.
When a special winning opening abnormal discharge error occurs, the error notification LED on the glass frame (two LED lamps 46b) lights in blue, and the other glass frame decoration LEDs (six LED lamps 46a of the glass frame top lamp 46). The nine LED lamps 48a to 48g of the left glass frame decoration lamp 48, the nine LED lamps 50a to 50g of the right glass frame decoration lamp 50, and the 19 LED lamps 52a to 52g of the left and right glass frame decoration lamps 52 52s) lights up in red.

The speakers 54 and 55 output a sound “abnormal discharge has been detected”, and the speaker 56 outputs a warning sound.
Further, on the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42, the character information “Large winning mouth abnormal discharge has been detected” is displayed.
The G board decoration LED (board lamp 53) is turned off.

FIG. 72 is a diagram showing an example of the effect production of the error effect that is executed when the probability variation area non-passing error occurs.
When a probability variation area non-passing error has occurred, the error notification LED on the glass frame (two LED lamps 46b) lights in blue, and other glass frame decoration LEDs (six LED lamps 46a of the glass frame top lamp 46, Nine LED lamps 48 a to 48 g of the left glass frame decoration lamp 48, nine LED lamps 50 a to 50 g of the right glass frame decoration lamp 50, and 19 LED lamps 52 a to 52 s of the left and right glass frame decoration lamp 52. ) Lights up in green.

Further, the speakers 54 to 56 do not output sound or warning sound when an error is detected.
Furthermore, the character information at the time of error detection is not displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42, and for example, the effect during the round being executed is displayed as it is.
The G board decoration LED (board surface lamp 53) is turned off or turned on according to the performance.

FIG. 73 is a diagram illustrating an effect example of an error effect that is executed when a probability variation region abnormal passage error occurs.
When a probability variation region abnormal passage error occurs, the error notification LED on the glass frame (two LED lamps 46b) lights in blue, and other glass frame decoration LEDs (six LED lamps 46a of the glass frame top lamp 46, Nine LED lamps 48 a to 48 g of the left glass frame decoration lamp 48, nine LED lamps 50 a to 50 g of the right glass frame decoration lamp 50, and 19 LED lamps 52 a to 52 s of the left and right glass frame decoration lamp 52. ) Lights in red.

Further, the speakers 54 to 56 do not output sound or warning sound when an error is detected.
Further, on the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42, the text information “Probability change region abnormal passage detected. Please call a staff member” is displayed.
The G board decoration LED (board lamp 53) is turned off.

  Next, an example of a control method for specifically realizing the above effects will be described. The above-described variable display effect, reach effect, pre-reach notice effect, stored image display effect, big role effect, error effect, etc. are all controlled through the following control process.

[Production control processing]
FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the effect control process executed by the effect control CPU 126. This effect control process is executed, for example, in a timer interrupt process (interrupt management process) separately from a reset start (main) process (not shown). The effect control CPU 126 generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined interrupt cycle (for example, a period of several tens of μs to several ms) during execution of the reset start process, and executes the timer interrupt process.

  The effect control process includes command reception process (step S400), error effect management process (step S400a), working memory effect management process (step S401), effect symbol management process (step S402), display output process (step S404), lamp This includes a subroutine group of drive processing (step S406), acoustic drive processing (step S408), effect random number update processing (step S410), and other processing (step S412). Hereinafter, the basic flow of the effect control process will be described along each process.

  Step S400: In the command receiving process, the effect control CPU 126 receives an effect command transmitted from the main control CPU 72. The effect control CPU 126 analyzes the received commands and stores them in the command buffer area of the RAM 130 according to type. The command for the effect transmitted from the main control CPU 72 includes, for example, a special figure destination determination effect command, a (special symbol) effect command when the operating memory number increases, a (special symbol) effect command when the operating memory number decreases, a start port Winning sound control command, demonstration effect command, lottery result command, variation pattern command, variation start command, stop symbol command, symbol stop command, state designation command, round number command, various error commands, jackpot end effect command, number of times There are a cut counter value command, a variation pattern destination determination command, a stop display time end command, a probability variation area passing command, a prize ball content command, and the like.

  Step S400a: In the error effect management process, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting an effect pattern for executing the error effect based on various error designation commands (error effect executing means). Details of the process will be described later.

  Step S401: In the action memory effect management process, the effect control CPU 126 controls execution of the stored image display effect and the pre-reading notice effect using the markers M1 and M2 (stored image display effect executing means). The contents of the working memory effect management process will be further described later with reference to another drawing.

  Step S402: In the effect symbol management process, the effect control CPU 126 controls the contents of the variable display effect and the stop display effect using the effect symbol, or at the time of the opening / closing operation of the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31. Control the contents of the production. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects effect patterns of various notice effects (notice effect before reach occurrence, notice effect after reach, etc.). The contents of the effect symbol management process will be further described later with reference to another drawing.

  Step S404: In the display output process, the effect control CPU 126 controls the effect display control device 144 (display control CPU 146) with basic control information of the effect contents (for example, the number of working memories of each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol). , An operation memory effect pattern number, a prefetch notice effect pattern number, a change effect pattern number, a change notice effect number, a background pattern number, etc.). Thereby, the effect display control device 144 (the display control CPU 146 and the VDP 152) controls the display operation by the liquid crystal display 42 based on the instructed effect content (effect executing means).

  Step S406: In the lamp driving process, the effect control CPU 126 outputs a control signal to the lamp driving circuit 132. In response to this, the lamp driving circuit 132 drives (turns on or off, blinks, changes in luminance gradation, etc.) the various lamps 46 to 52 and the panel lamp 53 based on the control signal.

  Step S408: In the next sound drive process, the effect control CPU 126 sends the effect contents (for example, BGM, sound data, etc. during the variable display effect, during the reach effect, during the mode transition effect, during the jackpot effect) to the sound drive circuit 134. Instruct. Thereby, the sound according to the production content is output from the speakers 54, 55, and 56.

  Step S410: In the effect random number update process, the effect control CPU 126 updates various effect random numbers in the counter area of the RAM 130. The effect random number includes, for example, a random number used for selecting a notice and a random number used for a normal background change lottery (effect lottery).

  Step S412: In other processing, for example, the effect control CPU 126 outputs a control signal to the driving IC of the movable body 40f. The movable body 40f operates using the movable body motor 57 as a drive source, and produces an effect in synchronism with the display of an image by the liquid crystal display 42 or independently.

  Through the above-described effect control process, the effect control CPU 126 can comprehensively control the effect contents in the pachinko machine 1.

[Error production management processing]
FIG. 75 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of the error effect management process. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along the example of a procedure.

  Step S750: The effect control CPU 126 checks whether or not an error command has been received from the main control CPU 72. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether an error command is stored. As a result, when it is confirmed that the error command is stored (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S752.

  The error commands include, for example, a special winning entrance entrance / exit ball mismatch error occurrence designation command, a special winning entrance entrance / exit ball mismatch error release designation command, a special winning exit abnormal discharge error occurrence designation command, a probability variation area abnormal passing error occurrence designation command, Passing error occurrence designation command, ordinary electric power illegal prize winning error occurrence designation command, special electric illegal prize winning error occurrence designation command, radio wave error 1 occurrence designation command, radio wave error 2 occurrence designation command, radio wave error 3 occurrence designation command, radio wave error 1 release designation command , Radio wave error 2 release designation command, radio wave error 3 release designation command, magnetic error 1 occurrence designation command, magnetic error 2 occurrence designation command, magnetic error 3 occurrence designation command, magnetic error 1 release designation command, magnetic error 2 release designation command, Magnetic error 3 release designation command, vibration Error generation specification command, vibration error release specification command, inner frame release error generation specification command, inner frame release error release specification command, glass frame release error generation specification command, glass frame release error release specification command, panel switch error generation specification command, This corresponds to the panel switch error release designation command.

  Step S752: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the error effect is being executed. For this confirmation, an execution flag is set for each error effect, and if even one of the execution flags is ON, the effect control CPU 126 can confirm that the error effect is being executed.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the error effect is being executed (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S754, and when it is not possible to confirm that the error effect is being executed (No), the effect control CPU 126 is the step. S760 is executed.

  Step S754: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the received command is an error cancel command. The error cancel command includes, for example, a grand prize winning entrance / exit ball mismatch error cancel specification command, a radio wave error 1 cancel specification command, a radio wave error 2 cancel specification command, a radio wave error 3 cancel specification command, a magnetic error 1 cancel specification command, and a magnetic error 2 cancel command. This includes a designation command, a magnetic error 3 release designation command, a vibration error release designation command, an inner frame release error release designation command, a glass frame release error release designation command, a panel switch error release designation command, and the like.

  As a result, if the received command is an error cancel command (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S756. If the received command is not an error cancel command (No), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S758.

  Step S756: The effect control CPU 126 executes a cancellation effect selection process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting a cancel effect according to the error cancel command. For example, when a special winning opening entrance / exit ball mismatch error release designation command is received, a process of selecting an effect pattern for ending the error effect that has been executed since the occurrence of the big winning entry entrance / exit ball mismatch error is executed.

  Step S758: The effect control CPU 126 checks whether or not the received command is a command having a higher priority than the error effect currently being executed. The priorities are as described with reference to FIGS.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the received command is a command having a higher priority than the currently executed error effect (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S760. On the other hand, when it is not possible to confirm that the received command is a command having a higher priority than the currently executed error effect (No), the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect control process (FIG. 74).

  Step S760: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the received command is a special winning opening entrance / exit ball mismatch error occurrence designation command.

  As a result, when the received command is a special winning entrance entrance / exit ball mismatch error occurrence designation command (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S768, and the received command is a special winning entrance entrance / exit ball mismatch error occurrence designation command. If this cannot be confirmed (No), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S762.

  Step S762: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the received command is a special winning opening abnormal discharge error occurrence designation command.

  As a result, when the received command is a special winning opening abnormal discharge error occurrence designation command (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S770, and confirms that the received command is a special winning opening abnormal discharge error occurrence designation command. When it cannot confirm (No), production control CPU126 performs step S764.

  Step S764: The effect control CPU 126 checks whether or not the received command is a probability variation area non-passing error occurrence designation command.

  As a result, when the received command is a probability variation area non-passing error occurrence designation command (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S772 and cannot confirm that the received command is a probability variation area non-passing error occurrence designation command. In the case (No), the production control CPU 126 executes Step S766.

  Step S766: The effect control CPU 126 checks whether or not the received command is a probability variation region abnormal passage error occurrence designation command.

  As a result, if the received command is a probability variation area abnormal passage error occurrence designation command (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S774, and it is not possible to confirm that the received command is the probability variation area abnormal passage error occurrence designation. (No), the production control CPU 126 executes step S776.

  Step S768: The effect control CPU 126 executes an effect selection process at the time of occurrence of the big prize opening / outgoing ball mismatch error. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting an error effect (entrance / exit ball mismatch error state occurrence transmission effect) shown in FIG.

  Step S770: The effect control CPU 126 executes the effect when the special winning opening abnormal discharge error occurs. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting an effect pattern for executing the error effect (abnormal discharge error state occurrence transmission effect) shown in FIG. 71 and the like for a predetermined time (60 seconds) (abnormal discharge error). State generation transmission effect execution means).

  Step S772: The effect control CPU 126 executes the effect when the probability variation area non-passing error occurs. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 executes the error effect (high probability state transition area non-passing error state occurrence transmission effect) shown in FIG. 72 or the like until the next big hit game is executed or the power is turned off. A process of selecting an effect pattern that continues to be executed is performed (high probability state transition area non-passing error state occurrence transmission effect executing means).

  Step S774: The effect control CPU 126 executes the effect when the probability variation region abnormal passage error occurs. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting an effect pattern that continues to execute the error effect (high probability state transition region abnormal passage error state occurrence transmission effect) shown in FIG. 73 and the like until the power is turned off. (High probability state transition region abnormal passage error state occurrence transmission effect execution means).

Step S774: The effect control CPU 126 executes an effect when an error occurs. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting the error notification effect described with reference to FIGS. 49 to 53 based on the received error command.
When the above processing is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect control process (FIG. 74).

[Working memory production management process]
FIG. 76 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of the working memory effect management process. Hereinafter, the contents will be described along a procedure example.

  Step S700: First, the effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the effect command at the time of increasing the number of working memories has been received from the main control CPU 72. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130, and confirms whether or not the effect command at the time when the number of working memories increases is stored. When it is confirmed that the production command when the number of working memories increases is saved (step S700: Yes), the production control CPU 126 executes step S702. When it is not possible to confirm that the production command when the number of working memories increases is saved (step S700: No), the production control CPU 126 does not execute step S702.

  Step S702: The effect control CPU 126 executes an effect selection process when the number of working memories increases. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects an effect for displaying the markers M1 and M2 corresponding to the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

  Step S704: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the effect command at the time when the number of working memories decreases is received from the main control CPU 72. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not the effect command when the number of working memories is reduced is stored. When it is confirmed that the production command when the number of working memories decreases is saved (step S704: Yes), the production control CPU 126 executes step S706. If it is not possible to confirm that the effect command when the number of working memories is reduced is stored (step S704: No), the effect control CPU 126 does not execute step S706.

Step S706: The effect control CPU 126 executes effect selection processing when the number of working memories decreases. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 is changing the marker corresponding to the lottery element consumed by the internal lottery and the effect of sliding the markers M1 and M2 corresponding to the first special symbol and the second special symbol from the pre-fluctuation display area X1. An effect to be moved to the display area X2 is selected. Note that the stored marker moved to the in-fluctuation display area X2 is deleted at the end of the change.
When the above procedure is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect control process (FIG. 74).

[Direction design management processing]
FIG. 77 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of effect symbol management processing. The effect symbol management process includes an execution selection process (step S500), an effect symbol change pre-process (step S502), an effect symbol change process (step S504), an effect symbol stop display process (step S506), and a variable winning device operation. This is a configuration including a subroutine group of processing (step S508). Hereinafter, the basic flow of the effect symbol management process will be described along each process.

  Step S500: In the execution selection process, the effect control CPU 126 selects the jump destination of the process to be executed next (any one of steps S502 to S508). For example, the effect control CPU 126 sets the program address of the process to be executed next as the jump destination address, and sets the end of the effect symbol management process in the “jump table” as the return address. Which process is selected as the next jump destination depends on the progress of the processes performed so far. For example, if the situation has not yet started the variation display effect, the effect control CPU 126 selects the effect symbol variation pre-processing (step S502) as the next jump destination. On the other hand, if the effect symbol variation pre-processing has already been completed, the effect control CPU 126 selects the effect symbol variation processing (step S504) as the next jump destination, and if the effect symbol variation in-process has been completed, As a jump destination, the effect symbol stop display in-progress process (step S506) is selected. The variable winning device operating process (step S508) is performed when the main control CPU 72 selects the big winning variable variable winning device management process (step S5000 in FIG. 23) or the small winning variable variable winning device management process (FIG. 23). When the middle step S6000) is selected, it is selected as a jump destination. In this case, steps S502 to S506 are not executed.

  Step S502: In the effect symbol variation pre-processing, the effect control CPU 126 performs an operation of preparing conditions for starting the variable display effect using the effect symbol. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects the content of the reach effect according to various conditions (lottery result, winning type, variation pattern, etc.), or the effect pattern for the notice effect (the reach other than the pre-reading notice effect pattern). Pre-occurrence notice pattern, reach occurrence notice pattern, etc.). In addition, the production control CPU 126 also performs demonstration production control when the pachinko machine 1 is in a so-called customer waiting state. The specific processing content will be described later using another flowchart.

  Step S504: In the effect symbol changing process, the effect control CPU 126 generates control information instructing the effect display control device 144 (display control CPU 146) as necessary. For example, when performing an effect using the effect switching button 45 during execution of the variable display effect using the effect symbol, the effect control CPU 126 monitors whether or not the player has operated the effect button, and an effect corresponding to the result is displayed. The control information on the contents (button effect) is instructed to the display control CPU 146.

  Step S506: In the effect symbol stop display processing, the effect control CPU 126 controls the contents of the stop display effect using the effect symbols and moving images in a manner corresponding to the result of the internal lottery. That is, the effect control CPU 126 instructs the effect display control device 144 (display control CPU 146) to end the variable display effect and execute the stop display effect. In response to this, the effect display control device 144 (display control CPU 146) ends the variable display effect that has been actually executed in the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42, and executes the stop display effect. Thereby, the stop display effect is executed substantially in synchronization with the stop display of the special symbol, and the result of the internal lottery can be effectively taught (disclosure, notification, notification, etc.) to the player (design effect execution). means). In addition, at the time of a small hit, the stop display effect can be executed in a manner similar to or close to the loss.

  Step S508: In the variable winning device operating process, the effect control CPU 126 controls the contents of the effect during the small hit or the big hit (special game effect executing means). In this processing, the effect control CPU 126 selects the contents of the prominent effect according to various conditions (for example, winning type). For example, in the case of a 9-round big hit, the effect control CPU 126 selects a 9-round big role effect pattern as the effect contents to be displayed on the liquid crystal display 42, and instructs this to the effect display control device 144 (display control CPU 146). . As a result, the image of the prominent effect is displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42, and the effect contents change as the round progresses.

[Preliminary design change processing]
FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the effect symbol variation pre-processing. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along the example of a procedure.

  Step S600: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not a demonstration effect command is received from the main control CPU 72. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not a demonstration effect command is stored. As a result, when it is confirmed that the command for demonstration effect is stored (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S602.

  Step S602: The effect control CPU 126 executes a demo selection process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects a demonstration effect pattern. The demonstration effect pattern defines the contents of the effect indicating that the pachinko machine 1 is in a so-called customer waiting state.

  When the above procedure is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the last address of the effect symbol management process. Then, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect control process as it is, and controls the contents of the demonstration effect based on the demonstration effect pattern in the subsequent display output process (step S404 in FIG. 74) and lamp driving process (step S406 in FIG. 74). To do.

  On the other hand, if it is confirmed in step S600 that the demonstration effect command is not stored (No), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S604.

  Step S604: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the current fluctuation is out of place (non-winning). Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not a lottery result command at the time of non-winning is stored. As a result, when it is confirmed that the lottery result command at the time of non-winning is saved (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S612. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the lottery result command at the time of non-winning is not saved (No), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S606. Note that whether or not the current variation is off can be confirmed based on a variation pattern command or a stop symbol command in addition to the lottery result command. In other words, if the current variation pattern command corresponds to the outlier normal variation or outlier reach variation, it can be determined that the current variation is outlier. Alternatively, if the current stop symbol command specifies a non-winning symbol, it can be determined that the current variation is out of sync.

  Step S606: If the lottery result command is other than non-winning (missing) (step S604: No), the effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the current fluctuation is a big hit. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not the lottery result command at the time of the big hit is stored. As a result, when it is confirmed that the lottery result command at the time of big hit is stored (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S610. On the contrary, when it is confirmed that the lottery result command at the time of big hit is not stored (No), since only the lottery result command at the time of small hit is left, in this case, the effect control CPU 126 executes step S608. Whether or not the current variation is a big hit can also be confirmed based on a variation pattern command or a stop symbol command. That is, if the current variation pattern command corresponds to the big hit variation, it can be determined that the current variation is a big hit. If the current stop symbol command corresponds to the jackpot symbol, it can be determined that the current variation is a jackpot.

  Step S608: The effect control CPU 126 executes a small hit hour variation effect pattern selection process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 determines the effect pattern number at that time based on the variation pattern command received from the main control CPU 72 (for example, “C0H00H” to “D0H7FH”). The effect pattern number is prepared in advance corresponding to the variation pattern command, and the effect control CPU 126 can select an effect pattern number corresponding to the variation pattern command at that time by referring to an effect pattern selection table (not shown). it can. The production pattern numbers may be prepared in pairs with the variation pattern commands, or a plurality of production pattern numbers may be prepared for one variation pattern command.

  When the effect pattern number is selected, the effect control CPU 126 refers to an effect table (not shown), changes the effect schedule (change time, reach type, and reach occurrence timing) corresponding to the change effect pattern number at that time, and stops. The display mode and the like are determined. Note that the types of effect symbols determined here correspond to the “combination of symbols at the time of a small hit”.

  The above procedure corresponds to the case of “small hit”, but in the case of hitting the big hit, the effect control CPU 126 confirms that it is “big hit” in step S606 (Yes). In this case, the effect control CPU 126 executes step S610.

  Step S610: The effect control CPU 126 executes a big hit hour fluctuation effect pattern selection process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 determines the effect pattern number at that time based on the variation pattern command (for example, “E0H00H” to “F0H7FH”) received from the main control CPU 72. In the big hit time effect pattern selection processing, the processing may be further branched for each big hit time stop symbol. The specific processing content will be further described later using another flowchart.

  In the case of non-winning, the following procedure is executed. In other words, when the effect control CPU 126 confirms that there is a shift in step S604 (Yes), it next executes step S612.

  Step S612: The effect control CPU 126 executes a deviation effect pattern selection process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 determines the effect pattern number at the time of deviation based on the variation pattern command (for example, “A0H00H” to “A6H7FH”) received from the main control CPU 72. The effect pattern numbers at the time of losing are classified into “ordinary deviation fluctuation”, “short-time deviation fluctuation”, “outlier reach fluctuation”, and the like, and a fine reach fluctuation pattern is defined in “outlier reach fluctuation”. Note that which effect pattern number is selected by the effect control CPU 126 is determined by the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control CPU 72.

  When the effect pattern number at the time of detachment is selected, the effect control CPU 126 refers to an effect table (not shown), and the effect symbol change schedule corresponding to the change effect pattern number at that time (change time, presence / absence of reach, occurrence of reach) , Reach type and reach occurrence timing) and stop display mode (for example, “7”-“2”-“4”, etc.). The specific processing content will be further described later using another flowchart.

  When any one of the above steps S608, S610, and S612 is executed, the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S614.

  Step S614: The effect control CPU 126 executes a notice selection process (notice effect executing means). In this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects the content of the notice effect to be executed during the current variable display effect by lottery. The content of the notice effect is determined based on, for example, the result of internal lottery (winning or non-winning) and the current internal state (normal state, high probability state, time reduction state). As described above, the notice effect is for notifying the player of the possibility that the reach state will occur during the variable display effect, or for notifying that there is a possibility that it will eventually be a big hit. Therefore, the selection ratio of the notice effect is set to be low at the time of non-winning, but the selection ratio of the notice effect is set to be relatively high to increase the player's expectation at the time of winning.

  Step S616: The effect control CPU 126 executes a mode effect management process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting a background image corresponding to the stay mode. For example, when the stay mode is “normal mode (low probability non-time shortened state)”, the production control CPU 126 selects a background image (for example, the background image shown in FIG. 56B) where the female character is sitting on the chaise longue. Execute the process.

  Further, when the stay mode is “fireworks rush (high probability time shortened state)”, the effect control CPU 126 performs a process of selecting a background image (for example, the background image shown in FIG. 62A) having fireworks as a motif. Run. Furthermore, when the stay mode is “coast mode (low probability time shortened state)”, the effect control CPU 126 performs a process of selecting a background image (for example, the background image shown in FIG. 69A) with the coast as a motif. Run.

  When the above procedure is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect symbol management process (end address). As a result, in the subsequent effect symbol variation processing (step S504 in FIG. 77), the variation display effect and the stop display effect are executed based on the actually selected variation effect pattern (effect execution means), and various A notice effect is executed based on the notice effect pattern.

[Big hit variation pattern selection process]
FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the big hit hour variation effect pattern selection process. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along the example of a procedure.

  Step S800: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the internal state is a high probability time shortening state. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 can confirm the internal state by accessing the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirming the state designation command. The internal state can also be confirmed by a variation pattern command (the same applies hereinafter).

  As a result, if the internal state is the high probability time shortening state (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S804. If the internal state is not the high probability time shortening state (No), the effect control CPU 126 performs step S802. Run.

  Step S802: The effect control CPU 126 checks whether or not the internal state is a low probability time shortening state. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 can confirm the internal state by accessing the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirming the state designation command.

  As a result, if the internal state is the low probability time shortening state (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S806. If the internal state is not the low probability time shortening state (No), the effect control CPU 126 performs step S808. Run.

  Step S804: The effect control CPU 126 executes a fireworks rush big hit effect pattern selection process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 determines the effect pattern number at that time based on the variation pattern command received from the main control CPU 72. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting an effect at the time of winning shown in FIGS.

  In addition, the effect control CPU 126 executes a battle effect (battle effect) in which a friend character and an enemy character battle each other during the change of the special symbol in the fireworks rush (match effect execution means). When the winning result is obtained in the internal lottery, a victory effect for winning the teammate character in the battle effect is executed (a victory effect executing means). On the other hand, when the result of non-winning is obtained in the internal lottery, a defeat effect that defeats the ally character in the battle effect is executed (defeat effect execution means).

  Step S806: The effect control CPU 126 executes a coast mode big hit effect pattern selection process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 determines the effect pattern number at that time based on the variation pattern command received from the main control CPU 72. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 executes a reach effect in the coast mode and executes a process of selecting an effect that is a big hit.

  Step S808: The effect control CPU 126 executes a normal mode big hit effect pattern selection process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 determines the effect pattern number at that time based on the variation pattern command received from the main control CPU 72.

  Then, when the above processing is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect symbol fluctuation pre-process (FIG. 78).

[Variation production pattern selection process during loss]
FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the above-described variation effect pattern selection process at the time of loss. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along the example of a procedure.

  Step S850: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the internal state is a high probability time shortening state. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 can confirm the internal state by accessing the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirming the state designation command.

  As a result, if the internal state is the high probability time shortening state (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S854, and if the internal state is not the high probability time shortening state (No), the effect control CPU 126 performs step S852. Run.

  Step S852: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the internal state is a low probability time shortening state. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 can confirm the internal state by accessing the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirming the state designation command.

  As a result, if the internal state is the low probability time shortening state (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S856. If the internal state is not the low probability time shortening state (No), the effect control CPU 126 performs step S858. Run.

  Step S854: The effect control CPU 126 executes effect pattern selection processing at the time of fireworks rush failure. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 determines the effect pattern number at that time based on the variation pattern command received from the main control CPU 72. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting an effect at the time of loss shown in FIGS.

  Step S856: The effect control CPU 126 executes an effect pattern selection process when the coast mode is off. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 determines the effect pattern number at that time based on the variation pattern command received from the main control CPU 72. Specifically, a process of selecting an effect at the time of failure shown in FIG.

  Step S858: The effect control CPU 126 executes effect pattern selection processing when the normal mode is off. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 determines the effect pattern number at that time based on the variation pattern command received from the main control CPU 72. The specific processing contents will be further described later with reference to another drawing.

  Then, when any of the above processes is finished, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect symbol variation pre-process (FIG. 78).

[Processing when the variable winning device is activated]
FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing a configuration example of the variable winning device operating process. The variable winning device operation process is a subroutine of execution selection processing (step S902), variable winning device operation pre-processing (step S904), variable winning device operation in-process (step S906), and variable winning device operation post-processing (step S908). This is a configuration including a (program module) group. Here, first, the basic flow of the variable winning device operating process will be described along each process.

  Step S902: In the execution selection process, the effect control CPU 126 selects the jump destination of the process to be executed next (any one of steps S904 to S908) from the “jump table”. For example, the effect control CPU 126 sets the program address of the process to be executed next as the jump destination address, and sets the end of the variable winning device operating process as the return destination address in the stack pointer.

  Which process is selected as the next jump destination depends on the progress of the processes performed so far. For example, if the variable winning device activation pre-processing has not yet started, the effect control CPU 126 selects the variable winning device activation pre-processing (step S904) as the next jump destination. Further, if the variable winning device operation pre-processing has already been completed, the effect control CPU 126 selects the variable winning device operating process (step S906) as the next jump destination. Furthermore, if the process during operation of the variable winning device is completed, the effect control CPU 126 selects the variable winning device operation post-processing (step S908) as the next jump destination.

  Step S904: In the variable winning device pre-operation process, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting the content of the effect to be executed during the big hit game or the small hit game. For example, in the case of winning with “9 round symbol 1”, a process of selecting an effect in which the ally character is defeated by the enemy character is executed. Also, in the case of winning with “9 round symbol 2”, a process of selecting an effect in which the ally character wins the enemy character or a normal bonus effect is executed. Further, in the case of winning with “16 round symbols”, processing for selecting a special bonus effect is executed.

  Step S906: In the variable winning device operating process, the effect control CPU 126 generates control information instructing the effect display control device 144 (display control CPU 146) as necessary. For example, when performing an effect using the effect switch button 45 during execution of the big hit effect, the effect control CPU 126 monitors whether or not the player has operated the effect button, and the content of the effect (button effect) according to the result is monitored. The control information is instructed to the display control CPU 146. Further, in this variable winning device operating process, if a probability change area passing command is received during the big hit game, an effect indicating that a V winning has occurred (an effect shown in (J) in FIG. 60) is selected. On the other hand, if the probability change area passing command is not received during the big hit game while the process is executed, a process of selecting an effect (effect shown in (N) in FIG. 61) indicating that no V winning has occurred. Execute.

  Step S908: In the variable winning device post-operation process, the effect control CPU 126 executes an effect of transmitting the transfer destination mode to the player during the end time of the variable winning device. For example, the effect control CPU 126 executes the coast mode rush effect or the fireworks rush rush effect depending on whether or not the winning symbol or the probability variation area has passed. Specifically, when a probability variation area passing command is received during a big hit game, a process of selecting an effect (effect shown in (K) in FIG. 60) indicating that the fireworks rush is entered is executed. When the probability variation area passing command is not received during the game, a process of selecting an effect (effect shown in (G) in FIG. 59) indicating the entry into the coast mode is executed.

[Pre-processing of variable winning device operation]
FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the variable prize device pre-operation process. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along the example of a procedure.

  Step S910: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the current winning symbol corresponds to “9 round symbol 1”. The winning symbol can be confirmed with a jackpot type command.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the current winning symbol corresponds to “9 round symbol 1” (Yes), the production control CPU 126 executes step S914, and the current winning symbol corresponds to “9 round symbol 1”. If this cannot be confirmed (No), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S912.

  Step S912: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the current winning symbol corresponds to “9 round symbol 2”.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the current winning symbol corresponds to “9 round symbol 2” (Yes), the production control CPU 126 executes step S913, and the current winning symbol corresponds to “9 round symbol 2”. If this cannot be confirmed (No), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S919.

  Step S913: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the internal state is a non-time shortening state. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 can confirm the internal state by accessing the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirming the state designation command.

  As a result, if the internal state is the non-time shortened state (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S917. If the internal state is not the non-time shortened state (No), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S918. .

  Step S914: The effect control CPU 126 executes a defeat effect selection process. Specifically, the process which selects the production which a teammate character loses by battle production is performed. For example, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process for selecting effects shown in (E) and (F) of FIGS.

  Step S917: The effect control CPU 126 executes a victory effect selection process. Specifically, the process which selects the production which a friend character wins by battle production is performed. For example, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting an effect shown in (H) in FIGS.

  Step S918: The effect control CPU 126 executes a normal bonus effect selection process. For example, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting an effect shown in FIG.

  Step S919: The effect control CPU 126 executes a special bonus effect selection process. Specifically, a process of selecting an effect for executing a special jackpot effect without executing the battle effect is executed. For example, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting an effect shown in FIG.

  Then, when the above process is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the variable winning device operating process (FIG. 81).

[Processing during variable winning system operation]
FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the variable winning device operating process. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along the example of a procedure.

  Step S920: The effect control CPU 126 executes a V prize related effect. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 checks whether or not a probability variation area passing command has been received in a specific round (probability variation round). If it is determined that the probability variation area passing command has been received, a process of selecting an effect (for example, an effect shown in FIG. 60 (J)) that conveys to the player that a V prize has occurred is executed. When it is determined that the probability variation area passing command has not been received, a process of selecting an effect (for example, an effect shown in (N) in FIG. 61) that conveys to the player that no V winning has occurred. Execute.

Step S922: The effect control CPU 126 executes a point effect management process. By executing this processing, it is possible to transmit to the player the profit obtained during the big hit game (the profit from the game). For example, the effect control CPU 126 selects an effect pattern that teaches the total number of points to be paid out based on the prize ball content command. Specifically, when the production control CPU 126 receives a prize ball instruction command corresponding to the first profit (a command indicating that a game ball has entered the first variable prize winning device 30 or the second variable prize winning device 31). The effect pattern which increases the total number of payout points by 15 points is selected.
When the above procedure is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the variable winning device operating process (FIG. 81).

As described above, according to the present embodiment, there are the following effects.
(1) According to the present embodiment, even if it is difficult for the game ball to pass through the probability variation region, the probability variation region abnormal passage error state occurs when the game ball passes through the probability variation region. Therefore, not only the malfunction of the second variable prize winning device 31 (for example, malfunction of a solenoid, ball clogging, etc.) but also an illegal prize winning action (maintenance goto, place ball goto) etc. to the variable prize winning device, etc. Various error conditions can be detected appropriately. Thereby, it is possible to find an error state that does not occur first in the normal game. Therefore, it is possible to deal with various error states in a gaming machine equipped with a probability variation area.

(2) In this embodiment, it is possible to detect an error state peculiar to a gaming machine equipped with a probability variation area. A staff member can quickly detect and deter fraudulent acts such as goto.

(3) According to the present embodiment, with reference to the probability variation area passing error target round determination data table 1, the determination regarding the probability variation area abnormal passing error state is executed, so the winning type (winning symbol) and the number of determination target rounds Based on the above, it can be easily determined whether or not the probability variation region is short-circuited. In addition, in this embodiment, since the probability variation area passing error target round determination data table 1 is provided separately from the operation pattern table of the variable winning device, all the rounds are referred to with reference to the operation pattern table of the variable winning device. Compared with the method of determining the error state, round games for determining the error state can be narrowed down, and efficient error determination processing can be executed.

(4) According to the present embodiment, when the probability variation area is short-circuited open in rounds 9 to 9 at the time of winning the 9-round symbol 1, the determination regarding the probability variation area abnormal passing error state is performed in all short-opening rounds. The accuracy of detecting an error state can be improved as compared with a method of determining an error state only by one of the short open rounds.

(5) In the present embodiment, when 9-round symbol 2 is selected, the probability variation area is released long in 7 rounds, and the probability variation area is short-released in 8 rounds and 9 rounds. Do not perform a determination on abnormal region passing error status. Here, originally, the short open round is a scene in which a probability variation area abnormal passing error state is judged, but when the 9 round symbol 2 is won, the 7th round includes the long open round, so it is normal. It is already determined that the game ball easily passes through the probability variation area and shifts to the high probability state if the game is in progress. And in such a scene, if the ball launched by a bona fide player accidentally passes the probability variation area in the 8th round or 9th round, and it is determined that the probability variation area abnormal passage error state, the continuity of the game is increased. It can be interrupted. Therefore, in this embodiment, when a long open round is included in one big hit game, the probability variation area abnormal passing error state is not determined for the short open round, and the efficient game progress And an efficient error state determination process can both be achieved.

(6) In this embodiment, it is possible to execute an error state determination process in consideration of the ball sweep time (a time of about several seconds after the attacker closes), and thus the error state was not detected during the ball sweep time. However, if an error state occurs during the ball sweeping time, it can be determined as an error state, and the error state determination accuracy can be improved.

(7) In this embodiment, when it is determined that the probability variation region abnormal passage error state is detected, a security signal indicating that an error state is occurring is transmitted to an external device (external terminal board, hall computer) Since the probability variation area abnormal passage error occurrence designation command is transmitted, error processing corresponding to the situation can be executed.

(8) In this embodiment, when the probability variation region abnormal passage error state occurs, if the power is turned on again after the power is turned off, the transmission of the security signal to the external device is stopped. An error canceling process can be executed, and if it is an attendant at a game hall, the error state can be canceled relatively easily. In addition, even if a probability variation area abnormal passing error state occurs, if it is determined that the game hall clerk is a bona fide player, the player is put into a high probability state by shutting off and returning the power without clearing the RAM. Can advance the game. On the other hand, if it is determined that the game attendant is a malicious player, the gaming state is returned to the low probability state by shutting off and returning the power accompanied by the RAM clear. As a result, it is possible to realize flexible return processing from the probability variation region abnormal passage error state.

(9) In this embodiment, when the probability variation region abnormal passage error occurrence designation command is received, the effect control device 124 transmits that the probability variation region abnormal passage error state has occurred until the power is turned off. Since the error effect is executed, the fact that the probability variation region abnormal passage error state has occurred can be transmitted in an easy-to-understand manner to the player and the staff of the game hall.

  The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and can be implemented with various modifications. The aspect of the effect mentioned in one embodiment is an example, and is not limited to the aspect of the effect described above.

  In the embodiment described above, an example of a gaming machine having a probability variation area has been described. However, a gaming machine that does not have a probability variation area (a normal probability variation machine having a normal winning symbol and a certain probability variation symbol, or a probability variation having only a probability variation symbol). Or a game machine in which a big hit occurs or a round continues as a game ball passes through a specific area. In this case, for example, the present invention can be modified by replacing the probability variation area described in the above-described embodiment with a specific area (V area), an accessory continuous operation area, a discharge area (discharge port), a winning opening, or the like. Inventions related to the present invention can be extracted.

  The images given in other production examples are merely examples, and these can be appropriately modified. Further, the structure, board surface configuration, specific numerical values and the like of the pachinko machine 1 are preferable examples including those shown in the drawings, and it goes without saying that these can be appropriately modified.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Pachinko machine 8 Game board unit 8a Game area 20 Start gate 28 Variable start winning device 33 Normal symbol display device 33a Normal symbol operation | movement memory lamp 34 1st special symbol display device 35 2nd special symbol display device 34a 1st special symbol operation memory Lamp 35a Second special symbol operation memory lamp 38 Game state display device 42 Liquid crystal display 45 Effect switching button 70 Main control device 72 Main control CPU
74 ROM
76 RAM
124 Production control device 126 Production control CPU

Claims (8)

An internal lottery execution means for executing an internal lottery when a lottery opportunity occurs during the game;
When the internal lottery is executed, the symbol display means for stopping and displaying the symbol in a mode according to the result of the internal lottery after the symbol is variably displayed over a predetermined fluctuation time;
If the prescribed condition is not satisfied during the game, the closed state in which it is difficult to enter the game ball into the big prize opening is maintained, while if the prescribed condition is satisfied, the big prize opening from the closed state is maintained. A variable winning device that makes it easy to enter a game ball into the open state,
When the result of the internal lottery corresponds to winning and the symbol is stopped and displayed in a predetermined winning manner by the symbol display means, the variable winning device is shifted from the closed state to the opened state for a predetermined time, or Alternatively, a special game execution in which a special game is executed by performing a unit game for shifting the variable prize-winning device from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined number of times until a predetermined number of game balls have entered within the predetermined time. Means,
Provided inside the variable winning device, when the variable winning device is in the closed state, it is difficult for a game ball to pass, and when the variable winning device is in the open state, the variable winning device is connected to the variable winning device. When a special condition that the variable winning device shifts to the open state is satisfied for a predetermined time during which it is easy for the game ball to enter, the game ball can easily pass, while the variable winning device is A special case where the variable winning device shifts to the open state for a short time shorter than the predetermined time when it is in an open state and it is difficult if a game ball cannot enter the variable winning device. A high-probability state transition region in which a game ball is difficult to pass when a certain condition is not satisfied,
Among the game balls that are provided inside the variable winning device and have entered the variable winning device, a discharge region through which a game ball that does not pass through the high probability state transition region passes,
Entry detection means for detecting that a game sphere has entered the big prize opening of the variable prize winning device;
High probability state transition region passage detection means for detecting that a game ball has passed the high probability state transition region;
A discharge area passage detecting means for detecting that the game ball has passed through the discharge area;
When the passing of a game ball is detected by the high probability state transition area passage detecting means during the execution of the special game, a low probability state in which winning is obtained with a predetermined probability with respect to the internal lottery after the special game is completed. High probability state transition means for transitioning to a high probability state where winning is obtained with a high probability in comparison,
The number of winning balls, which is the number of gaming balls detected by the incoming ball detection means, the number of gaming balls detected by the high probability state transition area passage detection means, and the gaming balls detected by the discharge area passage detection means When the number of discharged balls, which is the total number of balls, does not match, the input / output ball mismatch error state determination means for determining that it is an input / output ball mismatch error state,
It is provided as an error state determination unit different from the input / output ball mismatch error state determination unit, and it is difficult for the game ball to pass through the high probability state transition region without satisfying the special condition. Regardless, when the passage of the game ball is detected by the high-probability state transition region passage detection means, the high-probability state transition region abnormal passage error state determination unit that determines that the high-probability state transition region abnormal passage error state is present. Equipped gaming machine. In the gaming machine according to claim 1,
About the result at the time of winning obtained by the internal lottery, winning type defining means for prescribing a plurality of winning types,
When a winning result is obtained in the internal lottery, a winning type determining means for determining which of a plurality of winning types specified by the winning type specifying means corresponds to;
Variable winning device operation pattern defining means for defining an operation pattern of the variable winning device for each unit game of each of the plurality of winning types;
An error determination variable winning device operation pattern defining means for defining whether or not the special condition is satisfied for the unit game for which the high probability state transition region abnormal passing error state is determined. And
The high probability state transition region abnormal passage error state determination means,
A game machine, wherein the determination regarding the high probability state transition region abnormal passing error state is executed with reference to the error determination variable winning device operation pattern defining means. In the gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2,
The high probability state transition region abnormal passage error state determination means,
When the unit game that does not satisfy the special condition is executed a plurality of times without executing the unit game that satisfies the special condition in one special game, all the units that do not satisfy the special condition A game machine that performs a determination on the high probability state transition region abnormal passing error state in a game. In the gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3,
The high probability state transition region abnormal passage error state determination means,
When executing the unit game in which the special condition is satisfied in one special game and the unit game in which the special condition is not satisfied, the high probability state transition is performed in the unit game in which the special condition is not satisfied. A gaming machine characterized by not performing a determination regarding an abnormal region passing error state. In the gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 4,
The high probability state transition region abnormal passage error state determination means,
A gaming machine, wherein a determination regarding the high probability state transition region abnormal passing error state is executed after a lapse of a specified time from the end of the unit game. In the gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 5,
When it is determined that the high probability state transition region abnormal passing error state, a signal indicating that an error state is occurring is transmitted to an external device, and the high probability is transmitted from the main control device to the effect control device. A gaming machine comprising a high-probability state transition region abnormal passage error state occurrence processing execution means for transmitting high probability state transition region abnormal passage error state occurrence information indicating that a state transition region abnormal passage error state has occurred . The gaming machine according to claim 6,
When the high-probability state transition region abnormal passage error state occurs, if the power is turned on again after the power is turned off, a signal indicating that an error state is occurring is transmitted to the external device. A gaming machine comprising processing execution means for canceling a high probability state transition region abnormal passage error state to stop. The gaming machine according to claim 6 or 7,
When the high probability state transition region abnormal passage error state occurrence information is received, the high probability state transition region abnormality is transmitted to notify that the high probability state transition region abnormal passage error state has occurred until the power is turned off. A gaming machine comprising a high probability state transition region abnormal passage error state occurrence transmission effect executing means for executing a passage error state occurrence transmission effect.